Operator's Manual: Order No. 65155221 13 Part No. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

CLA
Operator's Manual
CLA Operator's Manual
É1175843400,ËÍ
1175843400
Order no. 65155221 13 Part no. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth® X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play.
marks of Apple Inc. ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- tected by copyright © 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
man International Industries. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- reserved.
Vehicle manufacturer
tion.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Daimler AG
XM Radio Inc.
Mercedesstraße 137
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
70327 Stuttgart
uity Digital Corporation.
Germany
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. As at 02.05.2013
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Android™
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- App may not yet be available in your country.
Benz Limited Warranty. The technical documentation team at
The equipment or product designation of your Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
vehicle may vary depending on: motoring.
Rmodel Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Rorder Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Rcountry specification A Daimler Company
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the CLA Guide smartphone
app:
Apple® iOS
1175843400 É1175843400,ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29
Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 75
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107
Climate control ................................. 123
Driving and parking .......................... 139
On-board computer and displays .... 195
Stowage and features ...................... 255
Maintenance and care ...................... 281
Breakdown assistance ..................... 295
Wheels and tires ............................... 313
Technical data ................................... 345

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Safety guidelines ............................. 42

Side impact air bag .......................... 46
12 V socket Window curtain air bag .................... 47
see Sockets Air-conditioning system
4ETS see Climate control
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Air vents
tion System) Important safety notes .................. 136
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 68 Rear ............................................... 137
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Setting ........................................... 136
drive) .................................................. 178 Setting the center air vents ........... 136
Display message ............................ 241 Setting the side air vents ............... 136
Alarm
A ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72
Display message ............................ 214 Switching the function on/off
Function/notes ................................ 63 (ATA) ................................................ 72
Important safety notes .................... 64 Alarm system
Warning lamp ................................. 245 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating cooling Ambient lighting
with air dehumidification ................. 129 Setting the brightness (on-board
Active Parking Assist computer) ...................................... 208
Canceling ....................................... 185 AMG
Detecting parking spaces .............. 182 Performance Seat .......................... 100
Display message ............................ 234 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 210
Exiting a parking space .................. 184 Anti-lock braking system
Function/notes ............................. 181 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes .................. 181 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Parking .......................................... 183 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 71 Ashtray ............................................... 264
Adaptive Brake Assist Assistance display (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 222 puter) .................................................. 204
Function/notes ................................ 66 Assistance menu (on-board com-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist puter) .................................................. 204
Display message ............................ 229 ASSYST PLUS
Function/notes ............................. 112 Displaying a service message ........ 287
Switching on/off ........................... 113 Hiding a service message .............. 287
Additional speedometer ................... 207 Notes ............................................. 286
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 350 Resetting the service interval dis-
Air bags play ................................................ 287
Deployment ..................................... 41 Service message ............................ 286
Display message ............................ 225 Special service requirements ......... 287
Front air bag (driver, front ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
passenger) ....................................... 44 Activating/deactivating ................... 72
Important safety notes .................... 43 Function ........................................... 72
Knee bag .......................................... 45 Switching off the alarm .................... 72
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor lamp ........................................... 47
Index 5
ATTENTION ASSIST Automatic transmission emer-

Activating/deactivating ................. 206 gency mode ....................................... 155
Display message ............................ 232
Function/notes ............................. 189 B
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 202
Backup lamp
Audio system
Changing bulbs .............................. 117
see separate operating instructions
Display message ............................ 228
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64
see Qualified specialist workshop
Battery (SmartKey)
Authorized Workshop
Checking .......................................... 78
see Qualified specialist workshop
Important safety notes .................... 78
AUTO lights
Replacing ......................................... 78
Display message ............................ 229
Battery (vehicle)
see Lights
Charging ........................................ 303
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Display message ............................ 231
stop function) .................................... 144
Important safety notes .................. 301
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Jump starting ................................. 305
start/stop function) .......................... 143
Belt
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109
see Seat belts
Automatic transmission Belt force limiter
Accelerator pedal position ............. 149 Activation ......................................... 55
Automatic drive program ............... 151 Function ........................................... 55
Changing gear ............................... 149 Blind Spot Assist
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146
Activating/deactivating ................. 206
Drive program display .................... 147
Display message ............................ 234
Driving tips .................................... 149
Notes/function .............................. 191
Emergency running mode .............. 155
Brake Assist
Engaging drive position .................. 148
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Engaging neutral ............................ 148
Brake fluid
Engaging park position (AMG vehi-
Display message ............................ 220
cles) ............................................... 149
Notes ............................................. 350
Engaging reverse gear ................... 147
Brake lamps
Engaging the park position ............ 147
Holding the vehicle stationary on Changing bulbs .............................. 117
uphill gradients .............................. 149 Display message ............................ 227
Kickdown ....................................... 150 Brakes
Manual drive program .................... 152 ABS .................................................. 63
Overview ........................................ 146 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66
Problem (malfunction) ................... 155 BAS .................................................. 64
Program selector button ................ 150 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350
Pulling away ................................... 142 Display message ............................ 214
Selector lever ................................ 148 HOLD function ............................... 176
Starting the engine ........................ 142 Important safety notes .................. 162
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 151 Maintenance .................................. 163
Transmission position dis- Parking brake ................................ 158
play ........................................ 147, 148 Riding tips ...................................... 162
Transmission positions .................. 149 Warning lamp ................................. 245
6 Index
Breakdown Central locking

see Flat tire Automatic locking (on-board com-
see Towing away/tow-starting puter) ............................................. 209
Bulbs Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76
see Replacing bulbs Changing bulbs
Brake lamps ................................... 117
C Cornering light function ................. 117
High-beam headlamps ................... 116
California
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116
Important notice for retail cus- Rear fog lamp ................................ 117
tomers and lessees .......................... 23 Reversing lamps ............................ 117
Calling up a malfunction Turn signals (front) ......................... 117
see Display messages Turn signals (rear) .......................... 117
Car Child-proof locks
see Vehicle Important safety notes .................... 62
Care Rear doors ....................................... 62
Carpets .......................................... 294 Children
Car wash ........................................ 288 In the vehicle ................................... 56
Display ........................................... 292 Restraint systems ............................ 56
Exhaust pipe .................................. 292 Special seat belt retractor ............... 59
Exterior lights ................................ 291 Child seat
Gear or selector lever .................... 293 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Interior ........................................... 292 anchors ............................................ 60
Matte finish ................................... 290 On the front-passenger seat ............ 59
Notes ............................................. 287 Top Tether ....................................... 61
Paint .............................................. 289 Cigarette lighter ................................ 265
Plastic trim .................................... 292
Climate control
Power washer ................................ 289
Automatic climate control ............. 125
Rear view camera .......................... 291
Automatic climate control (dual-
Roof lining ...................................... 294
zone) .............................................. 127
Seat belt ........................................ 294
Controlling automatically ............... 131
Seat cover ..................................... 293
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 129
Sensors ......................................... 291
Defrosting the windows ................. 133
Steering wheel ............................... 293
Defrosting the windshield .............. 133
Trim pieces .................................... 293
Washing by hand ........................... 288
Indicator lamp ................................ 131
Wheels ........................................... 289
Maximum cooling .......................... 133
Windows ........................................ 290
Notes on using dual-zone auto-
Wiper blades .................................. 290
matic climate control ............. 126, 128
Wooden trim .................................. 293
Overview of systems ...................... 124
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 259
Problems with cooling with air
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 261
dehumidification ............................ 131
Car wash (care) ................................. 288 Problem with the rear window
Center console defroster ........................................ 135
Lower section .................................. 35 Refrigerant ..................................... 352
Upper section .................................. 34 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 353
Setting the air distribution ............. 132
Index 7
Setting the airflow ......................... 132 Cornering light function

Setting the air vents ...................... 136 Changing bulbs .............................. 117
Setting the temperature ................ 131 Display message ............................ 226
Switching air-recirculation mode Function/notes ............................. 111
on/off ............................................ 135 Crash-responsive emergency light-
Switching on/off ........................... 129 ing ....................................................... 114
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135 Cruise control
Switching the rear window Activation conditions ..................... 166
defroster on/off ............................ 134 Cruise control lever ....................... 166
Switching the ZONE function on/ Deactivating ................................... 167
off .................................................. 132 Display message ............................ 236
Cockpit Driving system ............................... 166
Overview .......................................... 30 Function/notes ............................. 166
see Instrument cluster Important safety notes .................. 166
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Setting a speed .............................. 167
Activating/deactivating the dis- Storing and maintaining current
tance warning function .................. 205 speed ............................................. 167
Display message ............................ 214 Cup holder
Operation/notes .............................. 64 Center console .............................. 263
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Important safety notes .................. 262
PLUS Rear compartment ......................... 263
Activating/deactivating ................. 206 Customer Assistance Center
Display message ............................ 221 (CAC) ..................................................... 26
Operation/notes .............................. 67 Customer Relations Department ....... 26
COMAND
see separate operating instructions D
Combination switch .......................... 110
Compass Dashboard
Calibrating ..................................... 279 see Instrument cluster
Calling up ....................................... 278 Data
Setting ........................................... 278 see Technical data
Consumption statistics (on-board Daytime running lamps
computer) .......................................... 199 Display message ............................ 228
Convenience closing feature .............. 88 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Convenience opening feature ............ 88 puter) ............................................. 208
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 109
Coolant (engine)
Declarations of conformity ................. 25
Checking the level ......................... 285
Delayed switch-off
Display message ............................ 230
Filling capacity ............................... 351 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Important safety notes .................. 351 puter) ............................................. 208
Temperature (on-board com- Interior lighting .............................. 209
puter) ............................................. 210 Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
Temperature gauge ........................ 196 Digital speedometer ......................... 200
Warning lamp ................................. 251 DIRECT SELECT lever
Cooling see Automatic transmission
see Climate control Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 292
Copyright ............................................. 27
8 Index
Display messages Drive program

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 286 Automatic ...................................... 151
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 213 Display ........................................... 148
Driving systems ............................. 232 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 147
Engine ............................................ 230 Manual ........................................... 152
General notes ................................ 213 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 211
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 213 Driver's door
Lights ............................................. 226 see Doors
Safety systems .............................. 214 Driver's seat
SmartKey ....................................... 243 see Seats
Tires ............................................... 237 Driving abroad
Vehicle ........................................... 239 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 287
Distance recorder ............................. 199 Symmetrical low beam .................. 108
see Odometer Driving on flooded roads .................. 165
see Trip odometer Driving safety systems
Distance warning function 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
Activating/deactivating ................. 205 tem) ................................................. 68
Function/notes ................................ 64 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63
Warning lamp ................................. 253 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 71
DISTRONIC PLUS Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66
Activation conditions ..................... 170 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64
Cruise control lever ....................... 169 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 64
Deactivating ................................... 173 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Display message ............................ 235 PLUS ................................................ 67
Displays in the multifunction dis- Distance warning function ............... 64
play ................................................ 174 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Driving tips .................................... 174 bution) ............................................. 71
Function/notes ............................. 168 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Important safety notes .................. 168 gram) ............................................... 67
Setting the specified minimum ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
distance ......................................... 172 System) ........................................... 68
Warning lamp ................................. 253 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 68
Doors Important safety information ........... 63
Automatic locking (on-board com- Overview .......................................... 63
puter) ............................................. 209 STEER CONTROL ............................. 71
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 83 Driving systems
Central locking/unlocking Active Parking Assist ..................... 181
(SmartKey) ....................................... 76 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 189
Control panel ................................... 37 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 191
Display message ............................ 241 Cruise control ................................ 166
Emergency locking ........................... 83 Display message ............................ 232
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168
Important safety notes .................... 81 HOLD function ............................... 176
Opening (from inside) ...................... 81 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 193
Drinking and driving ......................... 161 Lane Tracking package .................. 191
PARKTRONIC ................................. 178
RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 177
Index 9
Rear view camera .......................... 186 Emergency release

Speed Limit Assist ......................... 190 Driver's door .................................... 83
Driving tips Trunk ............................................... 86
Automatic transmission ................. 149 Vehicle ............................................. 83
Brakes ........................................... 162 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Break-in period .............................. 140 Activation ......................................... 41
Checking brake lining thickness .... 164 Function ........................................... 55
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174 Safety guidelines ............................. 42
Downhill gradient ........................... 162 Emissions control
Drinking and driving ....................... 161 Service and warranty information .... 22
Driving abroad ............................... 108 Engine
Driving in winter ............................. 165 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 251
Driving on flooded roads ................ 165 Display message ............................ 230
Driving on wet roads ...................... 165 ECO start/stop function ................ 143
Exhaust check ............................... 161 Engine number ............................... 347
Fuel ................................................ 161 Irregular running ............................ 145
General .......................................... 160 Jump-starting ................................. 305
Hydroplaning ................................. 165 Starting problems .......................... 145
Icy road surfaces ........................... 165 Starting the engine with the
Limited braking efficiency on sal- SmartKey ....................................... 142
ted roads ....................................... 163 Switching off .................................. 158
Snow chains .................................. 317 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 310
Symmetrical low beam .................. 108 Engine electronics
Wet road surface ........................... 163 Problem (malfunction) ................... 145
DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 202 Engine jump starting
DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 203 see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
E Adding ........................................... 284
EASY-VARIO-PLUS system Additives ........................................ 350
Cargo compartment enlargement .. 259 Checking the oil level ..................... 283
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Checking the oil level using the
bution) dipstick .......................................... 284
Display message ............................ 231
Display message ............................ 216
Filling capacity ............................... 350
Function/notes ................................ 71
Notes about oil grades ................... 349
ECO display
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 283
Function/notes ............................. 161
Temperature (on-board com-
On-board computer ....................... 200
puter) ............................................. 210
ECO start/stop function
Viscosity ........................................ 350
Automatic engine start .................. 144
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 143
gram)
Deactivating/activating ................. 144
General information ....................... 143 4ETS ................................................ 68
Important safety notes .................. 143 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 211
Introduction ................................... 143 Characteristics ................................. 68
Electronic Stability Program Deactivating/activating (AMG
vehicles) .......................................... 69
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
10 Index
Deactivating/activating (except Front fog lamps

AMG vehicles) ................................ 205 Display message ............................ 227
Deactivating/activating (notes; Switching on/off ........................... 109
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69 Front windshield
Display message ............................ 214 see Windshield
ETS .................................................. 68 Fuel
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 68 Additives ........................................ 349
Function/notes ................................ 67 Consumption statistics .................. 199
General notes .................................. 67 Displaying the current consump-
Important safety information ........... 68 tion ................................................ 200
Trailer stabilization ........................... 71 Displaying the range ...................... 200
Warning lamp ................................. 247 Driving tips .................................... 161
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
tem) ...................................................... 68 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 348
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 68 Important safety notes .................. 348
Exhaust check ................................... 161 Premium-grade unleaded gaso-
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- line ................................................. 348
tions) .................................................. 292 Problem (malfunction) ................... 157
Exterior lighting Refueling ........................................ 155
Setting options .............................. 108 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 348
see Lights Fuel filler flap
Exterior mirrors Opening ......................................... 156
Adjusting ....................................... 103 Fuel level
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104 Calling up the range (on-board
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 computer) ...................................... 200
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 103 Fuel tank
Folding in when locking (on-board Capacity ........................................ 348
computer) ...................................... 210 Problem (malfunction) ................... 157
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Fuses
Setting ........................................... 104 Allocation chart ............................. 311
Storing settings (memory func- Before changing ............................. 310
tion) ............................................... 105 Fuse box in the engine compart-
Storing the parking position .......... 104 ment .............................................. 310
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 257 Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 311
F Important safety notes .................. 310
Filler cap
G
see Fuel filler flap
Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 347 Garage door opener
Flat tire Clearing the memory ..................... 277
MOExtended tires .......................... 297 General notes ................................ 274
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 296 Important safety notes .................. 275
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 298 Opening/closing the garage door .. 277
Floormats ........................................... 279 Programming (button in the rear-
Fog lamps view mirror) ................................... 275
Extended range .............................. 112 Gear indicator (on-board com-
Switching on/off ........................... 109 puter) .................................................. 210
Index 11
Gear or selector lever (cleaning Inspection

guidelines) ......................................... 293 see ASSYST PLUS
Genuine parts ...................................... 21 Instrument cluster
Glove box ........................................... 257 Overview .......................................... 31
Settings ......................................... 207
H Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 196
Handbrake
Interior lighting ................................. 113
see Parking brake
Automatic control .......................... 114
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 111
Delayed switch-off (on-board
Display message ............................ 242 computer) ...................................... 209
Headlamps Emergency lighting ........................ 114
Fogging up ..................................... 113 Manual control ............................... 114
see Automatic headlamp mode Overview ........................................ 113
Head restraints Reading lamp ................................. 113
Adjusting ......................................... 99 Setting the brightness of the
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100 ambient lighting (on-board com-
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99 puter) ............................................. 208
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100
Heating J
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps Jack
Changing bulbs .............................. 116 Storage location ............................ 296
Display message ............................ 227 Using ............................................. 337
Switching on/off ........................... 110 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 305
Hill start assist .................................. 142
HOLD function K
Activating ....................................... 176 Kickdown
Deactivating ................................... 177 Driving tips .................................... 150
Display message ............................ 233 Manual drive program .................... 154
Function/notes ............................. 176 Knee bag .............................................. 45
Hood
Closing ........................................... 283 L
Display message ............................ 241
Important safety notes .................. 282 Lamps
Opening ......................................... 282 see Warning and indicator lamps
Hydroplaning ..................................... 165 Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 206
I Display message ............................ 233
Function/information .................... 193
Ignition lock Lane Tracking package ..................... 191
see Key positions Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 211
Immobilizer .......................................... 72 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Indicator lamps anchors ................................................ 60
see Warning and indicator lamps License plate lamp (display mes-
Indicators sage) ................................................... 227
see Turn signals
12 Index
Light function, active Locking verification signal (on-

Display message ............................ 229 board computer) ............................... 209
Lights Low-beam headlamps
Activating/deactivating the inte- Changing bulbs .............................. 116
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 209 Display message ............................ 226
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109 Setting for driving abroad (sym-
Cornering light function ................. 111 metrical) ........................................ 108
Display message ............................ 226 Switching on/off ........................... 109
Driving abroad ............................... 108 Lumbar support
Fog lamps ...................................... 109 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 112 port ................................................ 100
Hazard warning lamps ................... 111
High beam flasher .......................... 111 M
High-beam headlamps ................... 110
Light switch ................................... 108 M+S tires ............................................ 316
Low-beam headlamps .................... 109 Malfunction message
Parking lamps ................................ 110 see Display messages
Rear fog lamp ................................ 109 Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Setting the brightness of the tions) .................................................. 290
ambient lighting (on-board com- mbrace
puter) ............................................. 208 Call priority .................................... 270
Standing lamps .............................. 110 Display message ............................ 220
Switching the daytime running Downloading destinations
lamps on/off (on-board com- (COMAND) ..................................... 270
puter) ............................................. 208 Downloading routes ....................... 273
Switching the daytime running Emergency call .............................. 267
lamps on/off (switch) .................... 109 General notes ................................ 266
Switching the exterior lighting Geo fencing ................................... 274
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 272
board computer) ............................ 208 MB info call button ........................ 269
Switching the surround lighting Remote vehicle locking .................. 272
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 208 Roadside Assistance button .......... 268
Turn signals ................................... 110 Search & Send ............................... 271
see Interior lighting Self-test ......................................... 267
see Replacing bulbs Speed alert .................................... 274
Light sensor (display message) ....... 229 System .......................................... 267
Loading guidelines ............................ 256 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 274
Locking Vehicle remote malfunction diag-
see Central locking nosis .............................................. 273
Locking (doors) Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 272
Automatic ........................................ 83 Mechanical key
Emergency locking ........................... 83 Function/notes ................................ 77
From inside (central locking but- Inserting .......................................... 77
ton) .................................................. 82 Locking vehicle ................................ 83
Locking centrally Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83
see Central locking Media Interface
see Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) ......................... 202
Index 13
Memory function ............................... 105 O

Mercedes-Benz CONNECT
Occupant Classification System
Recovering a stolen vehicle ........... 272
(OCS)
Search & Send ............................... 271
Message memory (on-board com- Faults ............................................... 51
puter) .................................................. 213 Operation ......................................... 47
System self-test ............................... 50
Messages
Occupant safety
see Display messages
Children in the vehicle ..................... 56
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
OCS
see Rear-view mirror
Faults ............................................... 51
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Operation ......................................... 47
Mobile phone
System self-test ............................... 50
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203
Oil
Modifying the programming
see Engine oil
(SmartKey) ........................................... 77
On-board computer
MOExtended tires .............................. 297
AMG menu ..................................... 210
Mounting wheels
Assistance menu ........................... 204
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 340
Audio menu ................................... 202
Mounting a new wheel ................... 339
Convenience submenu .................. 210
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 336
Displaying a service message ........ 287
Raising the vehicle ......................... 337
Display messages .......................... 213
Removing a wheel .......................... 339
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Factory settings submenu ............. 210
ing away ........................................ 337
MP3
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 207
Operation ....................................... 202 Lighting submenu .......................... 208
see separate operating instructions Menu overview .............................. 199
Multifunction display Message memory .......................... 213
Function/notes ............................. 198 Navigation menu ............................ 201
Permanent display ......................... 208 Operation ....................................... 197
Multifunction steering wheel RACETIMER ................................... 211
Operating the on-board computer .. 197 Service menu ................................. 207
Overview .......................................... 33 Settings menu ............................... 207
Standard display ............................ 199
N Telephone menu ............................ 203
Navigation Trip menu ...................................... 199
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Vehicle submenu ........................... 209
see separate operating instructions Video DVD operation ..................... 203
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Opening and closing the side trim
cle ....................................................... 140 panels ................................................. 117
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Operating system
see On-board computer
14 Index
Operator's Manual Range of the sensors ..................... 179

Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 Warning display ............................. 180
Outside temperature display ........... 197 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Overhead control panel ...................... 36 Problems (malfunction) .................. 225
Override feature PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Rear side windows ........................... 63 lamp ...................................................... 47
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
P tions) .................................................. 292
Power washers .................................. 289
Paint code number ............................ 346
Power windows
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 289
see Side windows
Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Program selector button .................. 150
Panorama roof with power tilt/
Protection of the environment
sliding panel
General notes .................................. 21
Important safety notes .................... 90 Pulling away
Opening/closing the roller sun-
Automatic transmission ................. 142
blind ................................................. 93
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94
Q
Rain closing feature ......................... 92
Resetting ......................................... 93 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
Parcel net ........................................... 259
Parking ............................................... 157 R
RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 177
Parking brake ................................ 158
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 211
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 104 Radar sensor system
Rear view camera .......................... 186 Activating/deactivating ................. 209
see Active Parking Assist Display message ............................ 233
see PARKTRONIC Radio
Parking aid Selecting a station ......................... 202
Active Parking Assist ..................... 181 see separate operating instructions
see Exterior mirrors Radio-wave reception/transmis-
see PARKTRONIC sion in the vehicle
Parking assistance Declaration of conformity ................ 25
see PARKTRONIC Rain closing feature (panorama
Parking brake roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 92
Display message ............................ 217 Reading lamp ..................................... 113
Electric parking brake .................... 158 Rear compartment
Warning lamp ................................. 250 Setting the air vents ...................... 137
Parking lamps Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off ........................... 110 Changing bulbs .............................. 117
PARKTRONIC Display message ............................ 228
Deactivating/activating ................. 180 Switching on/off ........................... 109
Driving system ............................... 178 Rear lamps
Function/notes ............................. 178 see Lights
Important safety notes .................. 178 Rear seats
Problem (malfunction) ................... 181 Folding the backrest forwards/
back ............................................... 260
Index 15
Rear view camera Roller sunblind

Cleaning instructions ..................... 291 Opening/closing .............................. 93
Function/notes ............................. 186 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Switching on/off ........................... 186 sliding panel ..................................... 92
Rear-view mirror Roof carrier ........................................ 261
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 103 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104 guidelines) ......................................... 294
Rear window defroster Roof load (maximum) ........................ 353
Problem (malfunction) ................... 135 Route (navigation)
Switching on/off ........................... 134 see Route guidance (navigation)
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Route guidance (navigation) ............ 201
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 352 S
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Safety
Important safety notes .................. 155 Children in the vehicle ..................... 56
Refueling process .......................... 156 Child restraint systems .................... 56
see Fuel Occupant Classification System
Remote control (OCS) ............................................... 47
Garage door opener ....................... 274 Safety system
Programming (garage door see Driving safety systems
opener) .......................................... 275 Seat
Replacing bulbs Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 100
Important safety notes .................. 114 Seat belts
Overview of bulb types .................. 115 Adjusting the height ......................... 54
Removing/replacing the cover Belt force limiters ............................ 55
(front wheel arch) .......................... 116 Cleaning ......................................... 294
Reporting safety defects .................... 26 Correct usage .................................. 52
Reserve (fuel tank) Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 55
see Fuel Fastening ......................................... 53
Reserve fuel Important safety guidelines ............. 52
Releasing ......................................... 54
Display message ............................ 231
Safety guidelines ............................. 42
Warning lamp ................................. 251
Warning lamp ................................. 243
see Fuel
Warning lamp (function) ................... 55
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135
Seats
Restraint system
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98
System)
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 148
port ................................................ 100
Reversing feature
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 91 Cleaning the cover ......................... 293
Roller sunblinds ............................... 92 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96
Side windows ................................... 87 Folding the backrest (rear com-
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 partment) forwards/back .............. 260
Seat heating problem .................... 102
16 Index
Storing settings (memory func- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80

tion) ............................................... 105 Starting the engine ........................ 142
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 141
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 291 Snow chains ...................................... 317
Service menu (on-board com- Sockets
puter) .................................................. 207 Center console .............................. 265
Service products Points to observe before use ......... 265
Brake fluid ..................................... 350 Rear compartment ......................... 266
Coolant (engine) ............................ 351 Trunk ............................................. 266
Engine oil ....................................... 349 Specialist workshop ............................ 26
Fuel ................................................ 348 Special seat belt retractor .................. 59
Important safety notes .................. 347 Speed, controlling
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- see Cruise control
tem) ............................................... 352 Speed Limit Assist
Washer fluid ................................... 352 Activating/deactivating the warn-
Settings ing function .................................... 205
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 210 Display message ............................ 232
On-board computer ....................... 207 Display message in the multifunc-
Setting the air distribution ............... 132 tion display .................................... 191
Setting the airflow ............................ 132 Function/notes ............................. 190
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 211 Important safety notes .................. 190
Side impact air bag ............................. 46 Speedometer
Side marker lamp (display mes- Activating/deactivating the addi-
sage) ................................................... 228 tional speedometer ........................ 207
Side windows Digital ............................................ 200
Cleaning ......................................... 290 In the Instrument cluster ................. 31
Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Segments ...................................... 197
Convenience opening feature .......... 88 Selecting the unit of measure-
Important safety information ........... 86 ment .............................................. 207
Opening/closing .............................. 87 see Instrument cluster
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90 SPORT handling mode
Resetting ......................................... 88 Activating/deactivating (AMG
Sliding sunroof vehicles) .......................................... 69
see Panorama roof with power Warning lamp ................................. 248
tilt/sliding panel SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
SmartKey tem)
Changing the battery ....................... 78 Display message ............................ 222
Changing the programming ............. 77 Introduction ..................................... 40
Checking the battery ....................... 78 Warning lamp ................................. 250
Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Convenience opening feature .......... 88 Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 243 Display message ............................ 228
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76 Switching on/off ........................... 110
Important safety notes .................... 76 Start/stop function
Loss ................................................. 80 see ECO start/stop function
Mechanical key ................................ 77 Starting (engine) ................................ 141
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141 STEER CONTROL .................................. 71
Index 17
Steering (display message) .............. 242 Technical data

Steering wheel Information .................................... 346
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102 Tires/wheels ................................. 340
Button overview ............................... 33 Vehicle data ................................... 353
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 197 TELEAID
Cleaning ......................................... 293 Call priority .................................... 270
Important safety notes .................. 102 Downloading destinations
Paddle shifters ............................... 151 (COMAND) ..................................... 270
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 151 Downloading routes ....................... 273
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 211 Emergency call .............................. 267
Stowage areas ................................... 256 General notes ................................ 266
Stowage compartments Geo fencing ................................... 274
Armrest (front) ............................... 258 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 272
Armrest (under) ............................. 258 MB info call button ........................ 269
Center console .............................. 257 Remote vehicle locking .................. 272
Center console (rear) ..................... 259 Roadside Assistance button .......... 268
Cup holders ................................... 262 Search & Send ............................... 271
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 257 Self-test ......................................... 267
Glove box ....................................... 257 Speed alert .................................... 274
Important safety information ......... 256 System .......................................... 267
Parcel net ...................................... 259 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 274
Under driver's seat/front- Vehicle remote malfunction diag-
passenger seat .............................. 258 nosis .............................................. 273
Stowage well beneath the trunk Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 272
floor .................................................... 261 Telephone
Summer tires ..................................... 316 Accepting a call ............................. 203
Sun visor ............................................ 263 Display message ............................ 242
Supplemental restraint system Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Number from the phone book ........ 204
System) Redialing ........................................ 204
Surround lighting (on-board com- Rejecting/ending a call ................. 203
puter) .................................................. 208 Temperature
Switching air-recirculation mode Coolant .......................................... 196
on/off ................................................. 135 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 210
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 210
T Outside temperature ...................... 197
Setting (climate control) ................ 131
Tachometer ........................................ 197 Theft deterrent systems
Tail lamps ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72
Display message ............................ 227 Immobilizer ...................................... 72
see Lights Through-loading ................................ 259
Tank Through-loading feature ................... 259
see Fuel tank Time
Tank content see separate operating instructions
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 211
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 298
18 Index
Tire pressure Load bearing index (definition) ...... 335

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 321 Load index ..................................... 332
Checking manually ........................ 320 Load index (definition) ................... 334
Display message ............................ 237 M+S tires ....................................... 316
Important safety notes .................. 321 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Maximum ....................................... 320 (definition) ..................................... 334
Notes ............................................. 319 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 300 tion) ............................................... 334
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 300 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Recommended ............................... 317 sure (definition) ............................. 334
Tire pressure monitoring system Maximum tire load ......................... 327
Checking the tire pressure elec- Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 334
tronically ........................................ 322 MOExtended tires .......................... 316
Function/notes ............................. 321 Optional equipment weight (defi-
General notes ................................ 321 nition) ............................................ 335
Important safety notes .................. 321 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Restarting ...................................... 323 inition) ........................................... 334
Warning lamp ................................. 254 Replacing ....................................... 336
Warning message .......................... 323 Service life ..................................... 316
Tires Sidewall (definition) ....................... 335
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 334 Speed rating (definition) ................ 334
Average weight of the vehicle Storing ........................................... 336
occupants (definition) .................... 333 Structure and characteristics
Bar (definition) ............................... 333 (definition) ..................................... 333
Changing a wheel .......................... 335 Summer tires ......................... 165, 316
Characteristics .............................. 333 Temperature .................................. 329
Checking ........................................ 315 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Curb weight (definition) ................. 334 (definition) ..................................... 335
Definition of terms ......................... 333 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 335
Direction of rotation ...................... 336 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 335
Display message ............................ 237 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 333
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire size (data) ............................... 340
pants (definition) ............................ 335 Tire size designation, load-bearing
DOT, Tire Identification Number capacity, speed rating .................... 330
(TIN) ............................................... 332 Tire tread ....................................... 315
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire tread (definition) ..................... 335
tion) (definition) ............................. 333 Total load limit (definition) ............. 335
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Traction ......................................... 328
(definition) ..................................... 333 Traction (definition) ....................... 335
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Tread wear ..................................... 328
inition) ........................................... 334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Standards ...................................... 328
ing) (definition) .............................. 334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Important safety notes .................. 314 Standards (definition) .................... 333
Increased vehicle weight due to Wear indicator (definition) ............. 335
optional equipment (definition) ...... 333 Wheel and tire combination ........... 342
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 334 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 333
Labeling (overview) ........................ 329 see Flat tire
Index 19
Top Tether ............................................ 61 Display message ............................ 226

Towing Switching on/off ........................... 110
Important safety guidelines ........... 307 Type identification plate
Installing the towing eye ................ 308 see Vehicle identification plate
Removing the towing eye ............... 309
Towing a trailer U
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Unlocking
gram) ............................................... 71 Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
Towing away From inside the vehicle (central
With both axles on the ground ....... 309 unlocking button) ............................. 82
With front axle raised ..................... 309
Tow-starting V
Emergency engine starting ............ 310
Important safety notes .................. 307 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 264
Installing the towing eye ................ 308 Vehicle
Removing the towing eye ............... 309 Correct use ...................................... 26
Transmission Equipment ....................................... 22
see Automatic transmission Individual settings .......................... 207
Transmission position display ......... 147 Limited Warranty ............................. 27
Transporting the vehicle .................. 309 Loading .......................................... 324
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83
tions) .................................................. 293 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76
Trip computer (on-board com- Lowering ........................................ 340
puter) .................................................. 199 Maintenance .................................... 23
Trip meter Parking for a long period ................ 160
see Trip odometer Pulling away ................................... 142
Trip odometer Raising ........................................... 337
Calling up ....................................... 199 Reporting problems ......................... 26
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 200 Securing from rolling away ............ 337
Trunk Towing away .................................. 307
Emergency release .......................... 86 Tow-starting ................................... 307
Emergency release button ............... 86 Transporting .................................. 309
Important safety notes .................... 84 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83
Opening/closing (manually from Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76
outside) ............................................ 84 Vehicle data ................................... 353
Opening (automatically from out- Vehicle data ....................................... 353
side) ................................................. 85 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 353
Opening automatically from Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83
inside ............................................... 85 Vehicle identification number
Trunk emergency release button ....... 86 see VIN
Trunk lid Vehicle identification plate .............. 346
Display message ............................ 241 Vehicle maintenance
Opening dimensions ...................... 353 see ASSYST PLUS
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 353 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 296
Turn signals Video (DVD) ........................................ 203
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 117 VIN ...................................................... 346
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 117
20 Index
W Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 286
Warning and indicator lamps Notes ............................................. 352
ABS ................................................ 245 Windshield wipers
Brakes ........................................... 245 Display message ............................ 242
Check Engine ................................. 251 Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Coolant .......................................... 251 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 119
Distance warning ........................... 253 Switching on/off ........................... 118
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 253 Winter driving
ESP® .............................................. 247 Slippery road surfaces ................... 165
ESP® OFF ....................................... 248 Snow chains .................................. 317
Fuel tank ........................................ 251 Winter operation
Overview .......................................... 32 General notes ................................ 316
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- Winter tires
tor lamp ........................................... 47 M+S tires ....................................... 316
Reserve fuel ................................... 251 Wiper blades
Seat belt ........................................ 243 Cleaning ......................................... 290
SPORT handling mode ................... 248 Important safety notes .................. 119
SRS ................................................ 250 Replacing (windshield) ................... 119
Tire pressure monitor .................... 254 Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
Warranty .............................................. 22 tions) .................................................. 293
Washer fluid Workshop
Display message ............................ 242 see Qualified specialist workshop
Wheel and tire combination
see Tires Z
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 340
Wheel chock ...................................... 337 ZONE function
Wheels Switching on/off ........................... 132
Changing a wheel .......................... 335
Checking ........................................ 315
Cleaning ......................................... 289
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 336
Interchanging/changing ................ 336
Mounting a new wheel ................... 339
Mounting a wheel .......................... 336
Removing a wheel .......................... 339
Storing ........................................... 336
Tightening torque ........................... 340
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 340
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 223
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 133
Introduction 21
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when
tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
sumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
the following areas of your vehicle:
them.
Rdoors
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats
qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit
Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console
starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out
is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
braking. qualified specialist workshop.
Z
22 Introduction
You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms
therefore be used. and conditions:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models.
REmission Performance Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws)
Benz parts (Y page 346). Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

ranty Information booklet, have an author-
This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War-
your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- you.
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Introduction 23
Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

nia
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you
more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our
occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA)
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the
tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty
of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio.
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified Change of address or change of own-
us in writing of the need for its repair, or ership
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please
repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change"
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
Z
24 Introduction
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or nance work as well as any required repairs
Customer Service (Canada) at carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1-800-387-0100.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Vehicle operation outside the USA
safety-relevant functions are only available
and Canada
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign for example, the power steering and the brake
countries, please be aware that: boosting effect. You will require considerably
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
not be readily available. of an accident.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic con- G WARNING
verter. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
engine damage. of fire.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
for delivery in Europe through our European check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
Delivery Program. For details, consult an particular, remove parts of plants or other
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to flammable materials which have become
one of the following addresses. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC G WARNING
European Delivery Department Modifications to electronic components, their
One Mercedes Drive software as well as wiring can impair their
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 function and/or the function of other net-
In Canada worked components. In particular, systems
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
European Delivery Department
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
98 Vanderhoof Avenue the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
Operating safety should have all work to electrical and elec-
Important safety notes tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
Introduction 25
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- approved by the party responsible for com-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- pliance could void the user’s authority to
dered invalid. operate the equipment."
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
curb or an unpaved road following two conditions: (1) These devices
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a may not cause interference, and (2) These
curb or a hole in the road devices must accept any interference, includ-
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage ing interference that may cause undesired
or parts of the chassis operation of the device."
In situations like this, the body, the under-
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage Diagnostics connection
being visible. Components damaged in this The diagnostics connection is only intended
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
an accident, no longer withstand the strain a qualified specialist workshop.
they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, G WARNING
combustible materials such as leaves, If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
grass or twigs can gather between the connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
these materials come in contact with hot the operating safety of the vehicle could be
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch affected. There is a risk of an accident.
fire. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
In such situations, have the vehicle tics connection in the vehicle.
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. If on con- G WARNING
tinuing your journey you notice that driving Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
vehicle immediately, paying attention to The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
road and traffic conditions. In such cases, jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
visit a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
Declarations of conformity securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Vehicle components which receive
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
and/or transmit radio waves
top of one another.
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ! If the engine is switched off and equip-
ation is subject to the following two condi- ment on the diagnostics connection is
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- used, the starter battery may discharge.
ful interference, and 2) These devices must Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
accept any interference received, including connection can lead to emissions monitoring
interference that may cause undesired oper- information being reset, for example. This
ation. Changes or modifications not expressly may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
Z
26 Introduction
requirements of the next emissions test dur- again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
ing the main inspection. tact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Qualified specialist workshop
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a One Mercedes Drive
qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
fications to correctly carry out the work In Canada
required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department
case for work relevant to safety. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
let. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects
Rservice and maintenance work USA only:
Rrepair work The following text is published as required of
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
tions Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rwork on electronic components
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
If you remove any warning stickers, you or inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
Leave warning stickers in position. ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Observe the following information when driv- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
ing your vehicle: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
motor vehicles
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- You can also obtain other information about
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
http://www.safercar.gov
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
Introduction 27
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
28
29
Cockpit ................................................. 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 31
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33
At a glance
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 36
Door control panel .............................. 37
30 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle D Climate control systems 124
shifters 151
E Ignition lock 141
; Combination switch 110
F Adjusts the steering wheel 102
= Instrument cluster 31
G Cruise control lever 166
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 158
A DIRECT SELECT lever 146
I Light switch 108
B PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 178 J Diagnostics connection 25
C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 282

Instrument cluster 31
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 196
ments 197
A Fuel gauge
; Multifunction display 198
B Instrument cluster lighting 196
= Tachometer 197
32 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: L Low-beam head- G M SPORT handling
lamps 109 mode in AMG vehicles 248
; T Parking lamps 110 H ? Coolant 251
= K High-beam head- I R Rear fog lamp 109
lamps 110
J N Fog lamps 109
? ÷ ESP® 247
K ; Check Engine 251
A Electric parking brake (red)
L h Tire pressure monitor 254
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) 250 M æ Reserve fuel 251
B ! Electric parking brake N å ESP® OFF 247

(yellow) 250 O ! ABS 245
C · Distance warning 253 P Brakes 245
D #! Turn signals 110 $ (USA only)
E 6 SRS 250 J (Canada only)
F ü Seat belt 243

Multifunction steering wheel 33
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 198 A =;
; Audio/COMAND display; Selects a menu 197
see the separate operating 9:
instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 197
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice Con-
Confirms your selection 197
trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions Hides display messages 213
? ~ B %
Rejects or ends a call 203 Back 197
Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con-
memory trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
34 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Audio system/COMAND; A £ Hazard warning
see the separate operating lamps 111
instructions
B 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG
; c Seat heating 101 OFF indicator lamp 47
= c PARKTRONIC 178 C Ú Selects the drive pro-
gram 150
? ¤ ECO start/stop func-
tion 143 å AMG vehicles: ESP® 69
Center console 35
Center console, lower section
At a glance
: Ashtray 264 ? Stowage compartment with
Cigarette lighter 265 Media Interface 256
Socket 265 A Audio/COMAND control-
Stowage compartment 256 ler; see the separate oper-
ating instructions
; Stowage compartment 256
= Cup holder 262
36 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear E F Roadside Assistance
interior lighting on/off 114 call button (mbrace sys-
tem) 268
; p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 113 F Eyeglasses compartment 257
= | Switches the front G 3 Opens/closes the
interior lighting/automatic panorama roof with power
interior lighting control off 114 tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 91
? ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system) 269 H c Switches the front
interior lighting on 114
A Rear-view mirror 103
I p Switches the left-
B Sets the compass 278 hand reading lamp on/off 113
C Buttons for the garage door
opener 277
D G SOS button (mbrace
system) 267
Door control panel 37
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 81 B W Opens/closes the
side windows 87
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 82 C n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
= r45= Saves for the side windows in the
the seat and exterior mirror rear compartment 63
settings 105
D o Opens the trunk 85
? Adjusts the seats electri-
cally 99
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 103
38
39
Useful information .............................. 40

Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Occupant safety .................................. 40
Children in the vehicle ........................ 56
Safety
Driving safety systems ....................... 63
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 72
40 Occupant safety
Useful information designed to do and could fail in the event of an

accident or activate unexpectedly, for exam-
i This Operator's manual describes all ple. There is an increased risk of injury.
models and all standard and optional equip- Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
publication of the Operator's manual.
Safety
electronic components or their software.

Country-specific differences are possible. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
Please note that your vehicle may not be accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
equipped with all features described. This tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.
also applies to safety-related systems and USA only: for further information contact our
functions. Customer Assistance Center at
i Read the information on qualified special- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).
ist workshops (Y page 26).
In this section, you will learn the most impor-
tant facts about the restraint system compo-
Panic alarm nents of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
RSeat belts
RChild restraint systems
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system
Additional protection is provided by:
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
RAir bag system components with:
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant
X To activate: press ! button : for at Classification System (OCS)

least one second. Although the systems are independent, their
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting protective functions work in conjunction with
flashes. each other. Not all air bags are always
X To deactivate: press ! button :
deployed in an accident.
again. i For information on infants and children
or traveling with you in the vehicle restraint
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. systems for infants and children, see "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (Y page 56).
Occupant safety
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Important safety notes
Introduction
G WARNING Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:
Modifications to the restraint systems could
RThe 6 SRS warning lamp
result in them not functioning properly any
more. The restraint systems could then no RAir bags
longer protect vehicle occupants as they are RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)
Occupant safety 41
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the Triggering of Emergency Tensioning

front seat belts and the outer seat belts in Devices and air bags
the rear
During the first stage of a collision, the air bag
RSeat belt force limiter for the front seat
control unit evaluates important physical
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
Safety
SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupants eration, such as:
coming into contact with parts of the vehi-
Rduration
cle's interior in the event of an accident. It can
Rdirection
also reduce the forces to which vehicle occu-
pants are subjected during an accident. Rmagnitude
Based on the evaluation of this data, the air
SRS warning lamp bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
Emergency Tensioning Device in the first
G WARNING stage.
If SRS is malfunctioning, restraint system If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-
components may be triggered unintentionally eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-
or might not be triggered at all in the event of tion, the front air bags are also deployed.
an accident with a high rate of vehicle decel-
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
eration. There is an increased risk of injury,
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates vehi-
possibly even fatal.
cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately of a collision. In the first deployment stage,
at a qualified specialist workshop. the front air bag is filled with enough propel-
lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The
SRS functions are checked regularly when
front air bag is fully deployed if a second
you switch on the ignition and when the
deployment threshold is reached within a few
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
milliseconds.
can be detected in good time.
The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bag
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
triggering thresholds are variable and are
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
adapted to the detected rate of deceleration
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is
after the engine is started.
pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process
The SRS components are in operational read- must take place in good time at the start of
iness when the 6 SRS indicator lamp goes the collision.
out while the engine is running.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
There is a malfunction if: tion and the direction of the force are essen-
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light tially determined by:
up when the ignition is switched on Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS sion
warning lamp does not go out after a few Rthe collision angle
seconds Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
cle
warning lamp lights up again Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors that can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
Z
42 Occupant safety
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

nor do they provide an indication of air bag HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
deployment. index.cfm.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bag on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
being deployed. This is the case if only parts
Safety
that has deployed must be replaced.

which are relatively easily deformed are affec- RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.
They could tear.
Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
RDo not make any modification that could
though the vehicle suffers only minor defor-
mation. This is the case if, for example, very change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may
members are hit, and sufficient deceleration severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
occurs as a result. not be able to provide adequate protection.
RDo not make any modifications to the SRS
i The front Emergency Tensioning Devices
wiring or components.
can only be triggered if the seat belt
RDo not modify or remove any components
tongues on the front seats are correctly
engaged in the seat belt buckles. or parts of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat
i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- covers, badges, etc. to the:
dent. The different air bag systems work
- padded steering wheel boss
independently of each other.
- knee bag covers
How the air bag system works is deter-
- front-passenger air bag cover
mined by predicting the severity of the acci-
dent, especially vehicle deceleration or - outer side of front seat bolsters
acceleration, and the type of accident: - outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seat
Rhead-on collision backrest

Rside - roof frame trim
impact
Rrollover RDo not install additional electrical/elec-
tronic equipment on or near SRS compo-
Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emer- nents and wiring.
gency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and RKeep the area between the air bags and
air bags occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,
handbags, umbrellas etc.).
G WARNING RDo not hang any objects such as coat hang-
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have ers on the coat hooks or the grab handle
been subjected to stress in an accident above the door. These items may be thrown
must be replaced. Their anchoring points around in the vehicle and cause head and
must also be checked. Only use seat belts other injuries when the window curtain air
installed or supplied by an authorized bag is deployed.
Mercedes-Benz Center. RAir bag system components will be hot after
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
sioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate RNever rest your feet on the dashboard or
material, which may require special han- the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor
dling and regard for the environment. in front of the seat.
Check your national disposal guidelines. In
Occupant safety 43
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a When the air bags are deployed, a small
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or amount of powder temporarily comes out of
causing unintended air bag deployment. the air bags. This dust, however, is generally
Work on the SRS must therefore only be neither harmful to your health, nor does it
performed by qualified technicians. Con- indicate a fire in the vehicle. In order to pre-
sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vent potential breathing difficulties, you may
Safety
RFor your protection and the protection of wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or safe to do so. If you have any breathing diffi-
ETD, our safety instructions must be fol- culty but cannot get out of the vehicle after
lowed. These are available from any author- the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by open-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. ing a window or door.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material G WARNING
of the air bags, there is the possibility of In order to reduce the potential danger of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries caused during the deployment of the
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. front air bags, the driver and front passenger
must always be correctly seated and wear
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz their seat belts.
strongly recommends that you inform the For maximum protection in the event of a col-
subsequent owner that the vehicle is equip- lision, you must always be in the normal seat
ped with SRS. Also, refer them to the appli- position with your back against the backrest.
cable section in the Operator's Manual. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is
correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable
Air bags speed and force, a proper seating position
Important safety notes and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
G WARNING distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. properly or are too close to the air bag can be
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
deployed air bags replaced at a qualified spe- inflates with great force instantaneously:
cialist workshop as soon as possible. Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
in a position that is as upright as possible
G WARNING with your back against the backrest.
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential Rmove the driver's seat as far back as pos-
of injury and fatality in certain: sible, still permitting proper operation of
Rfrontal impacts (driver's/front-passenger vehicle controls. The distance from the cen-
air bags and knee bags) ter of the driver's chest to the center of the
air bag cover on the steering wheel must be
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and win-
at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be
dow curtain air bags)
able to accomplish this by adjusting the
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
seat and steering wheel. If you have any
However, no system available today can com- difficulties, please contact an authorized
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
44 Occupant safety
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the the event of such a situation will the air bags
steering wheel or dashboard. provide their supplemental protection.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. If the driver and front passenger do not wear
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
increase the risk and potential severity of bags to provide their supplemental protec-
tion.
Safety
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag

inflates. In the event of other types of impacts and
Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back impacts below air bag deployment thresh-
as possible from the dashboard when the olds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver
seat is occupied. and passenger will then be protected to the
Roccupants, especially children, should extent possible by a properly fastened seat
never place their bodies or lean their heads belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also nee-
in the area of the door where the side ded to provide the best possible protection in
impact air bag inflates. This could result in a rollover.
serious or fatal injuries should the side Air bags provide additional protection; they
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
upright as possible, wear the seat belt prop- All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
erly and use an appropriately sized infant belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat equipped with air bags or not.
recommended for the size and weight of the It is important for your safety and that of your
child. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Failure to follow these instructions can result and to have any malfunctioning air bags
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. repaired. This will help to make sure the air
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you bags continue to perform their protective
make the buyer aware of this safety informa- function for the vehicle occupants in the
tion. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's event of a crash.
Manual. i After an air bag has been deployed, have
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is
bang, and a small amount of powder may also ready to drive.
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is Front air bags
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that there
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for peo-
ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can
also open the window to allow fresh air to
enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warn-
ing lamp lights up.
The air bag installation locations are identi-
fied by the AIR BAG symbol.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
Occupant safety 45
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove The front-passenger front air bag will only
box. deploy if:
The front air bags increase protection for the Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-
driver's and front passenger's head and sor readings, detects that the front-
chest. passenger seat is occupied
Safety
They are deployed: Rthe PASSENGER air bag OFF indicator lamp
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of on the center console is not lit
vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a (Y page 47)
longitudinal direction Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high
Rif the system determines that air bag impact severity
deployment can offer additional protection The front air bags are not deployed in situa-
to that provided by the seat belt tions where a low impact severity is predic-
Rindependently of other air bags in the vehi- ted. You will then be protected by the fas-
cle tened seat belt.
The release time of the front air bags is
dependent upon the use of the seat belt. Knee bags
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
generally not deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates vehi-
cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
of a collision. In the first deployment stage,
the front air bag is filled with part of the total
available propellant gas, thereby reducing the
risk of injury. If the air bag control unit rec-
ognizes within a few milliseconds that the
vehicle is being braked or accelerated faster
than originally predicted, the front air bag is Driver's knee bag : deploys underneath the
filled with the maximum amount of propellant steering column and front-passenger knee
gas available. bag ; underneath the glove box. They
The deployment of the front-passenger front deploy together with the front air bags. They
air bag is also influenced by the weight cate- are designed to operate together with the
gory of the front passenger, which is deter- front air bags in frontal impacts if certain
mined by the Occupant Classification System thresholds are exceeded. The knee bags
(OCS) (Y page 47). operate at best in conjunction with correctly
positioned and fastened seat belts.
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required Knee bags provide increased protection for
(predicted at the start of the impact) for sec- the driver and front passenger against the risk
ond stage inflation of the front-passenger of:
front air bag. In the second stage, the front air Rknee injuries
bags are inflated with the maximum amount Rthighinjuries
of propellant gas available. Rlower leg injuries
Z
46 Occupant safety
Side impact air bags

G WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
Safety
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as

they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the air bag deactivation system could
be restricted. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have Front side impact air bags : and rear side
been approved for the respective seat by impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
Mercedes-Benz. seat cushions.
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
G WARNING additional protection of the thorax for occu-
Sensors to control the air bags are located in pants on the front seats as well as also of the
the doors. Modifications or work not per- pelvis for the vehicle occupants on the side of
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- the vehicle on which the impact occurs. How-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the ever, they do not protect the:
function of the sensors being impaired. The air Rhead
bags might therefore not function properly
Rneck
any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
Rarms
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of The side impact air bags are deployed:
injury. Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of
Always have work on the doors or door pan- lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- e.g. in a side impact
shop. Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
You should only use seat covers that have Rindependently of the Emergency Tension-
been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- ing Devices

Benz. The seat covers must have a special Rindependently of the front air bags
tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air
the side impact air bags cannot deploy cor- bags are generally not deployed. Side impact
rectly and therefore cannot provide the inten- air bags are deployed if the system detects
ded protection in the event of an accident. high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a
lateral direction and determines that side
impact air bag deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the seat
belt.
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
Occupant safety 47
The side impact air bag on the front- Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
passenger side will deploy if the front- seat is occupied
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of Rindependently of the front air bags
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
or not. the event of impacts which do not exceed the
The side impact air bag on the front-
Safety
system's preset deployment thresholds for
passenger side does not deploy under the fol- vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
lowing conditions: then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas- Occupant Classification System
tened. (OCS)
How the Occupant Classification Sys-
Window curtain air bags tem works
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the front-passenger seat, have
the front passenger reposition himself or her-
self in the seat until the 45 indicator
lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front-passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS has classified
Window curtain air bags : enhance the level the front-passenger seat occupant as weigh-
of protection for the head, but not chest or ing as much as or less than a typical 12-
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of month-old child in a standard child restraint or
the vehicle on which the impact occurs. if the front-passenger seat is classified as
being empty.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deployed in When the OCS senses that the front-
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
12-month-old child in a standard child
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, illuminate when the engine is started and
e.g. in a side impact remain illuminated, indicating that the front-
Ron the side on which an impact occurs passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in When the OCS senses that the front-
the event of a vehicle rollover and if the passenger seat is classified as being empty,
system determines that air bag deployment the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
can offer the vehicle occupants additional when the engine is started and remain illumi-
protection to that provided by the seat belt nated, indicating that the front-passenger
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front-
passenger seat occupant is classified as
Z
48 Occupant safety
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
month-old child seated in a standard child Regardless of seating position, children 12
restraint or as being a small individual (such years old and under must be seated and prop-
as a young teenager or a small adult), the erly secured in an appropriate infant restraint,
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for toddler restraint, or booster seat recommen-
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is ded for the size and weight of the child.
Safety
started and then, depending on occupant The infant or child restraint must be properly
weight sensor readings from the front- secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out. belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors
With the 45 indicator lamp illumina- and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with
ted, the front-passenger front air bag is deac- the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
tivated. With the 45 indicator lamp Occupants, especially children, should always
out, the front-passenger front air bag is acti- sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
vated. properly and use an appropriately sized infant
When the OCS senses that the front- restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
passenger seat occupant is classified as an recommended for the size and weight of the
adult or someone larger than a small individ- child.
ual, the 45 indicator lamp will illumi- Children can be killed or seriously injured by
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the an inflating air bag. Note the following impor-
engine is started and then go out, indicating tant information when circumstances require
that the front-passenger front air bag is acti- you to place a child in the front-passenger
vated. seat:
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-
the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
nology designed to deactivate the front-
ted and will not be deployed.
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
If the 45 indicator lamp is not illumi- when the system senses the weight of a
nated, the front-passenger front air bag is typical 12-month-old child or less along
activated and will be deployed: with the weight of a standard appropriate
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
threshold front-passenger seat will be seriously
Rindependently of the side impact air bags injured or even killed if the front-passenger
If the front-passenger front air bag is front air bag inflates in a collision which
deployed, the rate of inflation will be influ- could occur under some circumstances,
enced by: even with the air bag technology installed in
your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as this risk completely is never to place a child
assessed by the air bag control unit in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
Rthe front passenger's weight category as passenger seat. We therefore strongly rec-
identified by OCS ommend that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.
G WARNING RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
According to accident statistics, children are the front-passenger seat, make sure the
safer when properly restrained on the rear 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, indicating that the front-passenger front air
we strongly recommend that children be bag is deactivated. Should the 45
Occupant safety 49
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while seat cushion as this may result in the OCS
the restraint is installed, please check being unable to correctly approximate the
installation. Periodically check the passenger's weight category.
45 indicator lamp while driving to RRead and observe all warnings in this chap-
make sure that the 45 indicator ter.
lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indi-
Safety
cator lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the front-passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint recommen- : PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ded for the age, size and weight of the
If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
child
lock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAG
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's
OFF indicator lamp : does not light up.
seat belt according to the child seat man-
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
ufacturer's instructions
categorizes the occupant on the front-
RFor children larger than the typical 12-
passenger seat using a weight sensor.
month-old child, the front-passenger front
The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
air bag may or may not be activated.
ted automatically for certain weight catego-
ries.
G WARNING
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the
shows you the current status.
instrument cluster and the 45 indica-
tor lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS is The system does not deactivate:
malfunctioning. The front passenger front air Rthe side impact air bag
bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the Rthe window curtain air bag
system checked by qualified technicians as Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
soon as possible. Contact an authorized
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
Mercedes-Benz Center.
must sit:
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS: with their back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet on the floor
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if
your back against the seat backrest. the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by
RWhen seated, a passenger should not posi-
leaning on the armrest.
tion him/herself in such a way as to cause If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the passenger's weight to be lifted from the the seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-
Z
50 Occupant safety
essary repair work carried out at a qualified placed entirely on the seat cushion and the
specialist workshop. backrest of the front-passenger seat back-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- rest.
mends that you only use seat accessories If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. seat backrest.
Safety
Both the driver and the front passenger An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
should always observe the PASSENGER AIR injuries to the child in case of an accident,
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of instead of increasing protection for the child.
whether or not the front passenger is posi- Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
tioned correctly. Observe also the air bag dis- installation of child restraint systems.
play messages that can be displayed in the
instrument cluster (Y page 225). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not lights up:
mean that the front-passenger front air bag Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock
will also deploy. to position 1 or 2
The OCS may have detected that the seat: Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-
Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
typical child up to twelve months old, occupant as an adult
seated in a child restraint system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a goes out again after approximately six sec-
young teenager or a small adult. onds.
Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
system whose weight is greater than that of detects that the front-passenger seat is
a typical twelve month old child. empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
These are examples of when the OCS deacti- tor lamp will continue to light up. The
vates the front-passenger front air bag. Deac- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will
tivation takes place although the collision ful- not go out.
fills the criteria for deploying the driver's air For further information, see "Problems with
bag. the Occupant Classification System"
For further information, see "Air bag display (Y page 51).
messages" (Y page 225).
System self-test
G WARNING
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illu-
minate, the system is not functioning. You
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
G WARNING
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside
and rear side child restraint system must be
Occupant safety 51
Problems with the occupant classification system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
Safety
lights up and remains position.
on. X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
The person on the cialist workshop.
front-passenger seat: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
Rhas the weight of a display (Y page 225).
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or stays on. X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint sys-
The front-passenger tem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If neces-
seat is: sary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Runoccupied X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Roccupied with the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
weight of a child up passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
to twelve months old being pulled too tightly.
in a child restraint X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
system X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the OCS checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until
the OCS has been repaired.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 225).
Z
52 Occupant safety
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-
month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Safety
Seat belts The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
G WARNING Rthe U.S. territories
The seat belt does not offer the intended level Rthe District of Columbia
of protection if the backrest is not in the Rall Canadian provinces
upright position. When braking or in the event Even where this is not required by law, all
of an accident, you could slide underneath the vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju- their seat belts before starting the journey.
ries, for example. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury. i See "Children in the vehicle"
Adjust the seat properly before beginning (Y page 56) for further information on
your journey. Always make sure that the seat infants and children traveling in the vehicle
is in the upright position. as well as on child restraint systems.
G WARNING Proper use of the seat belts

Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: G WARNING
Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty, USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
bleached or dyed
RSeat belts can only work when used prop-
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
erly. Never wear seat belts in any other way
extremely dirty than as described in this section, as that
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the could result in serious injuries in the event
belt anchorage has been modified. of an accident.
Damage caused to seat belts in an accident REach occupant should wear their seat belt
may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass. at all times, because seat belts help reduce
Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or the likelihood of and potential severity of
fail, for example in the event of an accident. injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may The integrated restraint system includes
be deployed unintentionally or fail to be SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
deployed when required. There is an bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. impact air bags, window curtain air bags for
Never modify seat belts, Emergency Tension- the side windows), Emergency Tensioning
ing Devices, seat belt anchorages and inertia Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front
reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged seat knee bolsters.
or worn and are clean. The system is designed to enhance the pro-
tection offered to properly belted occu-
Only use seat belts that have been approved pants in certain frontal (front air bags, driv-
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. er's side knee bag and ETDs) and side (side
impact air bags, window curtain air bags,
Occupant safety 53
and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
deployment thresholds and in certain roll- as upright as possible.
overs (window curtain air bags and ETDs). RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your sure it is properly positioned.
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. RNever place your feet on the instrument
Safety
In a frontal crash, your body would move panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
too far forward. That would increase the keep both feet on the floor in front of the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat seat.
belt would also apply too much force to the RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
ribs or abdomen, which could severely restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
injure internal organs such as your liver or booster seats, always follow the child seat
spleen. manufacturer's instructions.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to G WARNING
the middle of the shoulder. It should not Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder could tear.
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
the seat belt outlet.
This could damage the seat belt.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the lap belt is positioned across your abdo-
the seat belts.
men, it could cause serious injuries in a
crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breaka-
Fastening seat belts
ble objects in or on your clothing, such as G WARNING
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might
According to accident statistics, children are
cause injuries.
safer when properly restrained on the rear
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
snugly. Take special care of this when wear- we strongly recommend that children be
ing loose clothing. placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one Regardless of seating position, children 12
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt years old and under must be seated and prop-
around a person and another person or erly secured in an appropriately sized child
other objects at the same time. restraint system or booster seat recommen-
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a ded for the size and weight of the child. For
crash, you would not have the full width of additional information, see the "Children in
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the vehicle" section.
The twisted seat belt against your body A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-
could cause injuries. nificantly increased if the child restraints are
RPregnant women should also always use a not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
Z
54 Occupant safety
Belt height adjustment

Safety
You can adjust the seat belt height on the

front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder.
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
X To raise: slide the belt guide upwards.
an almost vertical position (Y page 96).
The belt guide will engage in various posi-
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash
tions.
guide :.
X To lower: hold belt guide release : and
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
slide the belt guide downwards.
tion of the seat belt across the middle of
X Let go of belt guide release : in the
your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis. desired position and make sure that the
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
belt guide engages.
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 54). Releasing seat belts
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
across your body. will be trapped in the door or in the seat
All seat belts in the vehicle with the exception mechanism. This could damage the door,
of the driver's seat belt are equipped with a the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
special seat belt retractor, to which a child aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
restraint system can be secured. For further protective function and must be replaced.
information on special seat belt retractors, Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
see (Y page 59).
Information on releasing the seat belt with
release button ? (Y page 54).
Occupant safety 55
60 seconds or until the driver or front

passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds again.
Safety
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but remains illu-
minated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated. The 7 seat
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt guide :.
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
Every time the engine is started, the 7
seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec- i For more information on the 7 seat
onds. It lights up regardless of whether the belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
driver's and front-passenger seat belts have cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
already been fastened. If the driver's and belts" (Y page 243).
front-passenger seat belts have already been
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
then goes out. belt force limiter
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
G WARNING
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
a maximum of six seconds or once the driv- that have been deployed are no longer opera-
er's seat belt is fastened. tional and are unable to perform their inten-
ded protective function. This poses an
If after six seconds, the driver or front increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed: Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices which have been triggered
Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
as long as the driver's or front-passenger's workshop.
seat belt is not fastened
and ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in
exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp the buckle on the front-passenger seat.
begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds Otherwise, the Emergency Tensioning
with increasing intensity for a maximum of Device could be triggered in the event of an
accident.
Z
56 Children in the vehicle
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
the rear are equipped with Emergency Ten- belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
sioning Devices and seat belt force limiters. force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, occupant is reduced.
pulling them close against the body. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
Safety
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat posi-

tions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. which absorb part of the deceleration force.
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back This results in the force exerted on the occu-
towards the backrest. pant being distributed over a greater area.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rthe ignition is switched on Children in the vehicle
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
Child restraint systems
"6 SRS warning lamp" (Y page 41)
Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt Important safety notes
buckle of the respective front seat
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
G WARNING
compartment are triggered independently of According to accident statistics, children are
the lock status of the seat belts. safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
and severity of an accident:
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli- possible. Regardless of seating position, chil-
sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler- dren 12 years old and under must be seated
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur- and properly secured in an appropriate infant
ing the initial stages of the impact. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle recommended for the size and weight of the
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lat- child.
eral direction on the side opposite to the The infant or child restraint must be properly
impact. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
Rin certain situations where the vehicle rolls belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
over if the system determines that it can top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
provide additional protection. child seat manufacturer's instructions.
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, Occupants, especially children, should always
and a small amount of powder may also be sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
released. Only in rare cases will the bang properly and use an appropriately sized infant
affect your hearing. The powder that is restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
released generally does not constitute a recommended for the size and weight of the
health hazard and does not indicate that there child.
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause Children can be killed or seriously injured by
some temporary breathing difficulty for peo- an inflating air bag. Note the following impor-
ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. To tant information when circumstances require
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the you to place a child in the front passenger
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can seat:
also open the window to allow fresh air to
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-
enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warn-
nology designed to deactivate the front
ing lamp lights up.
Children in the vehicle 57
passenger front air bag in your vehicle use the proper child restraint recommen-
when the system senses the weight of a ded for the age, size and weight of the child,
typical 12‑month-old child or less along and secure child restraint with the vehicle's
with the weight of a standard appropriate seat belt according to the child seat man-
child restraint on the front passenger seat. ufacturer's instructions.
Safety
RFor children larger than the typical
12‑month-old child, the front passenger G WARNING
front air bag may or may not be activated. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front intended. The child cannot then be restrained
passenger front air bag is deactivated. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the sudden changes of direction. There is an
front passenger seat will be seriously increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
injured or even killed if the front passenger Make sure that you observe the child restraint
front air bag inflates in a collision which system manufacturer's installation instruc-
could occur under some circumstances, tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
even with the air bag technology installed in that the base of the child restraint system is
your vehicle. The only means to completely always resting completely on the seat cush-
eliminate this risk is to never place a child in ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
a rear-facing child restraint in the front or behind the child restraint system. Only use
seat. We therefore strongly recommend child restraint systems with the original cover
that you always place a child in a rear-facing designed for them. Only replace damaged
child restraint in a backseat. covers with genuine covers.
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat G WARNING
because circumstances require you to do If the child restraint system is installed incor-
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
passenger front air bag is deactivated. sudden change in direction. The child
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
illuminate or go out while the restraint is ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
installed, please check installation. Period- risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
ically check the 4 5 indicator lamp Always install child restraint systems prop-
while driving to make sure the 4 5 erly, even if they are not being used. Make
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 4 sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
5 indicator lamp goes out or remains tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
out, do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been G WARNING
repaired. Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the tems which have been damaged or subjected
front passenger seat will be seriously to a load in an accident can no longer protect
injured or even killed if the front passenger as intended. The child cannot then be
front air bag inflates. restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- braking or sudden changes of direction. There
facing child restraint on the front passenger is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, fatal.
Z
Replace child restraint systems which have There is a risk of an accident and injury.
been damaged or subjected to a load in an When leaving the vehicle, always take the
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
ing systems on the child restraint system leave children or animals unattended in the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
before you install a child restraint system
Safety
reach of children.
again.
G WARNING
G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected
Infants and small children should never share to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
of an accident, they could be crushed fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
between the occupant and seat belt. vehicle.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-
nificantly increased if the child restraints are G WARNING
not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the If the child restraint system is subjected to
child is not properly secured in the child direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
restraint. dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Children that are too large for a child restraint particularly on the metal parts of the child
must travel in seats using normal seat belts. restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster you, always ensure that the child restraint
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/ restraint system has been exposed to direct
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
seat. child in it. Never leave children unattended in
When the child restraint is not in use, remove the vehicle.
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from becom- If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
ing a projectile in the event of an accident. RSecure the child with a child or infant seat
restraint system appropriate to the age and
G WARNING weight of the child.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, RMake sure that the infant or child is prop-
they could: erly secured at all times while the vehicle is
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other in motion.
people or road users. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
Rget out and disrupt traffic. properly secure all infants and children with a
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. child or infant seat restraint system for the
trip.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they: The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rall 50 states
Rshiftingthe automatic transmission out of
Rthe U.S. territories
park position P
RStart the engine.
Rthe District of Columbia once the child restraint system has been
Rall Canadian provinces secured.
Infants and children must always be seated in Installing a child restraint system:
an appropriate infant or child restraint system X Always comply with the manufacturer's
recommended for the size and weight of the installation instructions.
Safety
child. The infant or child restraint system X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
must be properly secured in accordance with
belt retractor.
the manufacturer's instructions.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
All infant or child restraint systems must meet
buckle.
the following standards:
RU.S.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards 213 and 225 X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards belt retractor retract it again.
213 and 210.2 While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
Confirmation that the child restraint system
belt retractor is activated.
corresponds to the standards can be found
X Push down on the child restraint system to
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found take up any slack.
in the installation instructions that are inclu- Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-
ded with the child restraint system. ing the special seat belt retractor:
Always read and follow the manufacturer's X Always comply with the manufacturer's
instructions when using an infant or child installation instructions.
restraint system or booster seat.
X Press the seat belt release button and
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
rior or on the infant or child restraint. The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted.
Special seat belt retractor
G WARNING Child restraint system on the front-
If you release the seat belt when driving, the passenger seat
special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
G WARNING
The released seat belt cannot be engaged If the front-passenger front air bag is not
again while driving, because the inertia reel deactivated:
pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
child restraint system is no longer properly
secured. There is an increased risk of serious on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
injury or even fatal injury. ously or even fatally injured by the front-
passenger air bag deploying. This is espe-
Always keep the seat belt of the activated
cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
special seat belt retractor engaged when driv-
vicinity of the front-passenger air bag when
ing.
it deploys.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
equipped with a special seat belt retractor. seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
When activated, the special seat belt retrac-
tor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken
Z
tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child

restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Rand you secure a forward-facing child
restraint system to the front-passenger
seat, you must move the front-passenger
Safety
seat as far back as possible. When doing so,

ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the
belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards
the front to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. Set the belt height
adjustment so that the belt strap is routed
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
towards the front along the bottom. restraint system
The front-passenger air bag is not deactiva- NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
ted: system on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR
Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivation BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
system on the front-passenger seat. to the CHILD can occur.
Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat, unless LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
a child restraint system with transponders in the rear
for an air bag deactivation system is instal-
led on the front-passenger seat. G WARNING
Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
system on the front-passenger seat, if the do not offer sufficient protective effect for
4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
lamp is not lit. (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
event of an accident, a child might not be
sponding warning sticker has been affixed to
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
the side of the dashboard and on both sides of
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
the sun visor on the front-passenger side.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
Information about recommended child
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
restraint systems is available at any author-
systems with which the child is also secured
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be

sure to observe the manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions and the instructions for cor-
rect use of the child restraint system.
! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt for the center seat does not get
trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor damaged.
Safety
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings :. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's
instructions when installing the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized secur-
ing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for two
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems Example: Top Tether belt with one belt strap
are installed on the left and right of the rear
seats. Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
Non LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
restraint system secured with LATCH-type
also be used and can be installed using the
(ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reduce
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
the risk of injury even further. If the child
seat according to the manufacturer's instruc-
restraint system is installed with Top Tether,
tions.
this should always be used.
Top Tether The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
in the rear compartment behind the outer
Important safety notes head restraints on the parcel shelf.
G WARNING There is also another Top Tether anchorage
point behind the central rear seat.
Always engage the rear seat backrests in an
upright position before installing the Top X Press down the rear of cover ; in the
Tether belt. Push and pull the rear seat backr- direction of the arrow.
ests to check whether they are engaged cor- Cover ; is raised slightly at the front.
rectly. If the seat backrest is not locked prop- X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
erly, the seat backrest could fold. The child =.
seat would no longer be supported properly or X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route
positioned to provide its intended benefit. Top Tether belt A centrally over head
That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. restraint :.
X Top Tether belt with two belt straps:
route Top Tether belts A on the left and
right past the side of head restraint :.
Z
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether G WARNING

anchorage =. If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not could:
twisted.
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
or road users
Safety
restraint system with Top Tether. Always

Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
comply with the child restraint system
traffic
manufacturer's installation instructions
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether
belt A is tight. trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
Child-proof locks override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Important safety notes the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, You can activate the following child-proof
they could: locks:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other Rrear doors (Y page 62)
people or road users. Rrear side windows (Y page 63)
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Child-proof locks for the rear doors
motion if, for example, they: G WARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious inju-
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of ries or an accident. Therefore, when children
park position P ride in the rear always secure the rear doors
RStart the engine. with the child-proof locks.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the You secure each door individually with the
vehicle. child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
Driving safety systems 63
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance
from the outside. warning function and adaptive Brake
X To activate: press the child-proof lock Assist) (Y page 64)
lever up in the direction of arrow :. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are (Y page 64)
Safety
working properly. RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 67)
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
(Y page 71)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 71)
Override feature for the rear side win-
dows RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 71)
G WARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, Important safety notes
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the If you fail to adapt your driving style or
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping become distracted, the driving safety sys-
themselves in the rear side window. tems can neither reduce the risk of accident
nor override the laws of physics. Driving
safety systems are merely aids designed to
assist driving. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
and for braking in good time. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road,
weather and traffic conditions and maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
carefully.
i The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
X To activate/deactivate: press button :. is adequate contact between the tires and
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the the road surface. Pay particular attention to
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is the information regarding tires, recommen-
only possible using the switches in the driv- ded minimum tire tread depths etc. in the
er's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, oper- "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 314).
ation is possible using the switches in the In wintry driving conditions, always use
rear compartment. winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this section
Driving safety systems work as effectively as possible.
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
the following driving safety systems:
General information
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 63) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)
Z
64 Driving safety systems
This allows you to continue steering the vehi- BAS (Brake Assist System)
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument General information
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
on. It goes out when the engine is running. tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
Safety
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,

Important safety notes thus shortening the stopping distance.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 63).
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac- G WARNING
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
ally, further driving safety systems are deac- in an emergency braking situation is
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- increased. There is a risk of an accident.
ding and accidents. In an emergency braking situation, depress
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. the wheels from locking.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also Braking
become inoperative. Observe the information X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 245) and the emergency braking situation is over.
display messages which may be shown in the ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
instrument cluster (Y page 214).
The brakes will function as usual once you
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery roads, even if
you only brake gently. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Braking General notes
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance
uation is over. warning function, which are described in the
X To make a full brake application:
following.
depress the brake pedal with full force.
Distance warning function
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. Important safety notes
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion of hazardous road conditions, and function (Y page 63).
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
G WARNING and the · distance warning lamp will light

The distance warning function does not react: up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Rto people or animals
distance from the vehicle in front.
Rto oncoming vehicles
or
Rto crossing traffic
Safety
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
Rwhen cornering
so.
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
provide a warning in all critical situations.
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
There is a risk of an accident.
tions may also cause the system to display a
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- warning.
uation and be ready to brake.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
G WARNING
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
The distance warning function cannot always extended period of time.
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
Up to a speed of about 40 mph (70 km/h), the
situations.
distance warning function can also react to
In such cases, the distance warning function stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
may: parked vehicles.
Rgive an unnecessary warning If you approach an obstacle and the distance
Rnot give a warning warning function detects a risk of a collision,
There is a risk of an accident. the system will initially alert you both visually
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- and acoustically.
uation and do not rely solely on the distance In particular, the detection of obstacles can
warning function. be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
Function ing the sensors
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
tivate the distance warning function in the
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
on-board computer (Y page 205).
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
If the distance warning function is activated, example in parking garages
the Ä symbol appears in the assistance
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
graphics display.
motorbike
The distance warning function can help you to
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle
relative to the center of your vehicle
ahead or reduce the effects of such a colli-
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-
sion. If the distance warning function detects
that there is a risk of a collision, you will be LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
warned visually and acoustically. Without Observe the notes in the section on break-
your intervention, the distance warning func- ing-in (Y page 140).
tion cannot prevent a collision. Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), cle, have the configuration and operation of
the distance warning function warns you if the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
intermittent warning tone will then sound,
Z
sions at low speeds where there is no visible Should you approach an obstacle and Adap-
damage to the front of the vehicle. tive Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
sion, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the
Adaptive Brake Assist braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end
collision. Should you apply the brakes vigo-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- rously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automati-
Safety
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63). cally increase the braking force to a level suit-
G WARNING able for the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
identify objects and complex traffic situa- emergency braking situation is over.
tions. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may: The brakes will work normally again if:
Rintervene unnecessarily Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rnot intervene Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
There is a risk of an accident. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- vehicle.
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive Brake
Assist requires particularly high brake pres-
G WARNING sure, preventative passenger protection
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: measures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simul-
Rto people or animals taneously.
Rto oncoming vehicles Up to vehicle speeds of around 250 km/h,
Rto crossing traffic adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to
Rto stationary obstacles
moving objects that have already been rec-
ognized as such at least once over the period
Rwhen cornering
of observation. Adaptive Brake Assist does
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not not react to stationary obstacles.
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
risk of an accident. (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- of reacting to moving objects that have
uation and be ready to brake. already been recognized as such at least once
over the period of observation. Adaptive
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Brake Assist does not react to stationary
complicated but non-critical driving condi- obstacles.
tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
vene.
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking dur- brake system remains available with full
ing hazardous situations at speeds above brake boosting effect and BAS.
4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensor
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
system to evaluate the traffic situation.
be impaired if there is:
With the help of a sensor system, adaptive
Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
the path of your vehicle for an extended ing the sensors
period of time. Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources automatically within a speed range of

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
example in parking garages (200 km/h).
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can
motorbike also react to stationary obstacles with auto-
matic braking within a speed range of
Safety
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 19 mph
(30 km/h).
LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Observe the notes in the section on break-
ing-in (Y page 140). Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- ing the sensors
cle, have the configuration and operation of Rthere is snow or heavy rain
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- Rthere is interference by other radar sources
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
sions at low speeds where there is no visible example in parking garages
damage to the front of the vehicle. Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
General information relative to the center of your vehicle

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC. LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Observe the notes in the section on break-
extends the functionality of COLLISION PRE- ing-in (Y page 140).
VENTION ASSIST with an automatic braking Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
function. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST cle, have the configuration and operation of
PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
reduce the effects of such a collision. If COL- sions at low speeds where there is no visible
LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects damage to the front of the vehicle.
that there is a risk of a collision, you will be
warned visually and acoustically. In critical
situations COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
PLUS also initiates automatic braking.
General notes
Function
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tion (Y page 63).
tivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS in the on-board computer ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
(Y page 206). i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
activated, the Ä symbol appears in the If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
assistance graphics display. from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
If the driver's seat belt is fastened, COLLI-
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can brake
Z
keep the vehicle on the desired course within ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when front or rear axle raised.
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. vehicle with the front axle raised, it is impor-
tant that you observe the notes on ESP®
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Safety
(Y page 309).
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Vehicles with 4MATIC: when towing your
tion (Y page 63). vehicle with both axles on the ground, it is
important that you observe the notes on ESP®
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
(Y page 309).
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
they spin. This enables you to pull away and ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF
accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
if the road surface is slippery on one side. In up continuously when the engine is running.
addition, more drive torque is transferred to If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å
the wheel or wheels with traction. ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,
ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
ESP®. Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 247) and display messages which
Important safety notes may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 214).
G WARNING
i Only use wheels with the recommended
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
properly.
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Characteristics of ESP®
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
! When testing the electric parking brake
on a braking dynamometer, switch off the beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP®
may otherwise destroy the brake system. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni-
tion when the electric parking brake is If ESP® intervenes:
being tested on a brake dynamometer. X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- stances.
erwise destroy the brake system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
formance tests may only be carried out on
a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate ing road and weather conditions.
the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please
consult a qualified workshop. You could
otherwise damage the drive train or the The ECO start/stop function switches the
brake system. engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automati-
cally when the driver wants to pull away again. X To activate:(Y page 205).
ESP® remains in its previously selected sta- The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before instrument cluster goes out.
the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
Safety
again. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
AMG vehicles) tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
You can select between the following states
of ESP®: Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
RESP® is activated.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
RESP® is deactivated. ting action for better traction on loose sur-
G WARNING faces.
Rtraction control is still activated.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk RESP® still provides support when you
of skidding and an accident. brake.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG
vehicles)
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
lowing situations: Important safety notes
Rwhen using snow chains i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 63).
Rindeep snow
Ron sand or gravel You can select between the following states
of ESP®:
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
RESP® is activated.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel RESP® is deactivated.
starts to spin.
G WARNING
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an When SPORT handling mode is activated,
extended period with ESP® deactivated. there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. dents.
Deactivating/activating ESP® Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
uations described in the following.
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the
on-board computer. G WARNING
X To deactivate:(Y page 205).
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
instrument cluster lights up. of skidding and an accident.
Z
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- The SPORT handling mode message
bed in the following. appears in the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
In the following situations, it may be better to briefly press button :.
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate The M SPORT handling mode warning
ESP®: lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Safety
Rwhen using snow chains X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until

Rin deep snow the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
Ron sand or gravel in the instrument cluster.
Ron designated roads when the vehicle's The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul-
own oversteering and understeering char- tifunction display.
acteristics are desired X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and instrument cluster goes out. The ÷
experienced driver. ESP® ON message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- dling mode
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
starts to spin. or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an warning lamp in the instrument cluster
extended period with ESP® deactivated. flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
Deactivating/activating ESP®
RESP® only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.
Rtraction control is still activated.
Rengine torque is only restricted to a limited
degree, and the drive wheels are able to
spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
faces.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
X To activate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
The M SPORT handling mode warning If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®: ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if

RESP® no longer improves driving stability. ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a
malfunction.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
Safety
ting action for better traction on loose sur- tion)
faces.
Rtraction control is still activated. General information
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
intervenes. stability while braking.
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-
ger available; nor is it activated if you brake Important safety notes
firmly with assistance from ESP®. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RESP® still provides support when you tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).
brake.
G WARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
ESP® trailer stabilization
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-
General information ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to You should therefore adapt your driving style
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and
cialist workshop.
limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
trailer combination has stabilized. Observe information regarding indicator and
Important safety notes warning lamps (Y page 245) as well as dis-
play messages (Y page 216).
G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent ADAPTIVE BRAKE
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
a risk of an accident. tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
also has the HOLD function (Y page 176) and
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
hill start assist (Y page 142). For further
ing road and weather conditions.
information, see Driving tips (Y page 162).
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer
combination) begins to lurch, you can only
STEER CONTROL
stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by
depressing the brake firmly. General information
ESP® trailer stabilization is active above
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
speeds of about 40 mph (65 km/h).
noticeable steering force to the steering
Z
72 Theft deterrent locking system
wheel in the direction required for vehicle ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in partic-
ular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
Safety
a wet or slippery road surface when you

brake.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if: X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart-
RESP® is malfunctioning. Key.
Rthe lighting is faulty. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
tem is armed after approximately
Power steering will, however, continue to
15 seconds.
function.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
Theft deterrent locking system or
Immobilizer X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
being started without the correct SmartKey. alarm system is armed and you open:
X To activate: remove the SmartKey from Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
the ignition lock. Ra door
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey
engine can be started by anyone with a valid into the ignition lock.
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated or
when you start the engine. X Press the % or & button on the
In the event that the engine cannot be star- SmartKey.

ted when the starter battery is fully The alarm is switched off.
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. The alarm is not switched off, even if you
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz close the open door that triggered it, for
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the example.
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Theft deterrent locking system 73
i If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
Safety
sage provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
vice.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
Z
74
75

SmartKey ............................................. 76
Doors .................................................... 81
Trunk .................................................... 84
Side windows ...................................... 86
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ........................................ 90
Opening and closing

76 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
models and all standard and optional equip- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
ment of your vehicle available at the time of cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
publication of the Operator's manual. risk of an accident.
Country-specific differences are possible. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
Please note that your vehicle may not be SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
Opening and closing
equipped with all features described. This inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
i Read the information on qualified special- magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
ist workshops (Y page 26). control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
SmartKey Do not keep the SmartKey:
Important safety notes Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
G WARNING Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, foil
they could:
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey functions
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
motion if, for example, they:
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
leave children or animals unattended in the : & To lock the vehicle
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of ; F To open the trunk lid
reach of children. = % To unlock the vehicle
X To unlock centrally: press button =.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even Rthe vehicle is locked again.
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
vehicle. again.
SmartKey 77
X To lock centrally: press button :. X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
Rthe doors
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
Rthe trunk lid onds until the battery check lamp flashes
Rthe fuel filler flap twice (Y page 78).
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
Opening and closing

i When it is dark, the surround lighting also Mechanical key
comes on if it is activated in the on-board General notes
computer (Y page 208).
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
i You can also set an audible signal to con- the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
firm that the vehicle has been locked. The
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
audible signal can be activated and deacti-
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
vated using the on-board computer
system will be triggered (Y page 72).
(Y page 209).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X To open the trunk lid automatically:
press and hold button ; until the trunk lid X Press the % or & button on the
opens (Y page 85). SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Changing the settings of the locking If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
system key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
You can change the settings of the locking automatically.
system. When you then unlock the vehicle X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap SmartKey into the ignition lock.
are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently
travel on your own. Removing the mechanical key
XTo change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp (Y page 78)
flashes twice.
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the vehi-
cle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks
the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X Push release catch : in the direction of
X To unlock the driver's door: press the the arrow and at the same time remove
% button once. mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice.
Z
78 SmartKey
For further information about: Checking the battery

Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83)
Runlocking the trunk (Y page 86)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83)
Inserting the mechanical key

X Push mechanical key ; completely into
Opening and closing
the SmartKey until it engages, and release

catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
Important safety notes check lamp : lights up briefly.
G WARNING The battery is discharged if battery check
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- lamp : does not light up briefly.
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in X Change the battery (Y page 78).
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
injury.
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If pressing the & or % button:
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Rlocksor
immediately.
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
and regard for the environment. National cialist workshop.
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ Replacing the battery
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
index.cfm. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have Key (Y page 77).
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of the
SmartKey 79
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.

When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
Opening and closing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 77).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Z
80 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening and closing
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary
(Y page 78).
X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % /
& button.
The SmartKey is faulty.

X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 81

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 301).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 305).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

started using the X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
SmartKey. doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors G WARNING
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
they could: vehicle.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other You should preferably place luggage or loads
people or road users. in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
Rget out and disrupt traffic. ing guidelines (Y page 256).
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
motion if, for example, they: Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of i When a door is opened, the side window
park position P on that side opens slightly. When the door
is closed, the side window closes again.
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. ! The side windows will not open/close if
the battery is discharged or if the side win-
dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-
sible to close the door. Do not attempt to
force the door closed. You could otherwise
damage the door or the side window.
reach of children.
Z
82
Opening and closing Doors
X To unlock and open a front door: pull X To unlock: press button :.

door handle ;. X To lock: press button ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed,
up. The door is unlocked and opens. the vehicle locks.
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
knob :. locked or unlocked.
The door is unlocked and can be opened. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the You can open a door from inside the vehicle
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they even if it has been locked. You can open the
are secured by the child-proof lock rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
(Y page 62). are secured by the child-proof lock
(Y page 62).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside If the vehicle has previously been locked with
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
Switch off the alarm (Y page 72). will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
Centrally locking and unlocking the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
vehicle from the inside taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This can be useful if you wish button for the central locking, or
to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
example. The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-
viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside
is unlocked.
Doors 83
Automatic locking feature
Opening and closing

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
X To disarm: press and hold button : for The door is unlocked.
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
X To arm: press and hold button ; for about
it.
five seconds until a tone sounds. X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
i If you press one of the two buttons and do Key (Y page 77).
not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
turning. SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
You could therefore lock yourself out if: X Open the driver's door.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
Rthe vehicle is being towed. doors and the trunk lid.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X Press the locking button (Y page 82).
You can also switch the automatic locking X Check whether the locking knobs on the
function on and off using the on-board com- front-passenger door and the rear doors
puter (Y page 209). are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs by hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
ical key) Key (Y page 77).
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 72).
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 77).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
Z
84 Trunk
! The trunk lid swings upwards when

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 353).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
Opening and closing
in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-

ing guidelines (Y page 256).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as could otherwise lock yourself out.
it will go to position 1. The trunk lid can be:
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
Ropened and closed manually from outside
it.
Ropened automatically from outside
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
Ropened automatically from inside
are locked.
Runlocked from inside with the mechanical
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 77). key
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,

the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- Opening/closing manually from out-
theft alarm system is not armed. side
Opening
Trunk X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. X Pull handle :.
X Raise the trunk lid.
G WARNING
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Trunk 85
Closing X Press and hold the F button on the

SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
or
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and let it go again immediately.
Opening automatically from inside
Opening and closing

G WARNING
X Pull down the trunk lid using handle :.
X Let the trunk lid drop into the lock.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
button on the SmartKey. especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
Opening automatically from outside the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
G WARNING ! The trunk lid swings upwards when
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a (Y page 353).
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening Opening
open.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 353).
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
lid.
unlocked.
X To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
Z
86 Side windows
Emergency release
If the trunk lid can no longer be opened from
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the trunk lid.
Opening and closing
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid

can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 353). X Press emergency release button : briefly.
You can reach the emergency release via the The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
trunk. Fold the rear backrests forward The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened
(Y page 260). with the trunk lid emergency release when
the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-
ted or discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
X Insert suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver,

horizontally on the left-hand side into emer- Side windows
gency release slot :.
X Push tool ; evenly in the direction of the
arrow and open the trunk lid. G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83),
the closing area could become trapped. There
the trunk is also locked.
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
Emergency release button body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
You can open the trunk lid from inside the the switch to open the side window again.
vehicle with the emergency release button.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
Side windows 87
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle.
Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object
Opening and closing

blocks or restricts a side window from trav-
eling upwards during the automatic closing
process, the side window opens again auto-
matically. During the manual closing process, : Front left
the side window only opens again automati- ; Front right
cally after the corresponding switch is = Rear right
released. The automatic reversing feature is ? Rear left
only an aid and is no substitute for your atten-
tion when closing a side window. i When the override feature for the side
windows is activated (Y page 63), the side
G WARNING windows cannot be operated from the rear.
The reversing feature does not react:
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- ignition lock.
gers X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
Rwhile resetting responding switch.
This means that the reversing feature cannot X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- point of resistance and release it.
uations. There is a risk of injury. Automatic operation is started.
Make sure that no body parts are in close X To close manually: pull the corresponding
proximity during the closing procedure. If switch and hold it.
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
to open the side window again.
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt automatic operation:
Opening and closing the side win-
dows press/pull the corresponding switch again.
i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
The switches for all side windows are located point of resistance, automatic operation is
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on started in the corresponding direction. You
each door for the corresponding side window. can stop automatic operation by pressing/
The switches on the driver's door take prec- pulling the switch again.
edence.
i You can continue to operate the side win-
dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Z
88 Side windows
Convenience opening When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
neously:
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
Rclose the side windows
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions simultane- Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/
ously: sliding panel
Runlock the vehicle On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
Ropen
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
the side windows
roller sunblinds.
Opening and closing
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and the roller sunblinds i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
er's door handle.
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The X Press and hold the & button until the
SmartKey must be close to the driver's side windows and the panorama roof with
door handle. power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
door handle.
panel are closed.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama sunroof On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
are in the desired position. tilt/sliding panel:
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof X Press and hold the & button again until
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
roller sunblinds are opened first. with power tilt/sliding panel close.
X Press and hold the % button again until X To interrupt convenience closing:
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding release the & button.
panel is in the desired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button. Resetting the side windows
You must reset each side window if:
Convenience closing feature Rthe side window opens again slightly after
being closed fully.
G WARNING Rthe side window can no longer be fully
When the convenience closing feature is oper- opened or closed.
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
X Close all the doors.
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
ignition lock.
Observe the complete closing procedure
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in control panel until the side window is com-
close proximity during the closing procedure. pletely closed (Y page 87).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Side windows 89
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 87).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly. If
Opening and closing

this is not the case, repeat the steps above
again.
Z
90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding If somebody becomes trapped:

panel Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Important safety notes Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
tilt/sliding panel. ped.
G WARNING G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, If children operate the sliding sunroof they
body parts in close proximity could become could become trapped, particularly if they are
trapped. There is a risk of injury. left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close When leaving the vehicle, always take the
proximity during the opening and closing pro- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
cedures. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 91
G WARNING G WARNING
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto- The reversing feature does not react:
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
trap you or other persons. There is a risk of gers
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
movement
vehicle is in motion.
Rduring resetting
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
Opening and closing

Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
ing sunroof lifts during opening. ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may uations. There is a risk of injury.
occur. Make sure that no body parts are in close
Do not allow anything to protrude from the proximity during the closing procedure.
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could If somebody becomes trapped:
be damaged.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
! The weather can change abruptly. It could Rduring automatic operation, push the
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the switch briefly in any direction
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
The closing process is stopped.
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle inte-
rior.
Operating the sliding sunroof
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object Overhead control panel
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during : To raise
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens ; To open
again automatically. The automatic reversing = To close/lower
feature is only an aid and is no substitute for
your attention when closing the sliding roof. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Make sure that the roller sunblinds are
open.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
Z
i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
the point of resistance, automatic opera- ped.
tion is started in the corresponding direc-
tion. You can stop automatic operation by The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
pressing/pulling the switch again. from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
Automatic operation for raising is available only be opened and closed together when the
only when the sliding sunroof is closed. sliding sunroof is closed.
i You can continue to operate the sliding

Opening and closing
Roller sunblind reversing feature

sunroof after switching off the engine or
removing the SmartKey from the ignition The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
lock. This function remains active for five automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
minutes or until you open a front door. blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
closing process, the roller sunblind opens
Rain-closing feature again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
The raised sliding sunroof automatically low- relieve you of the responsibility of paying
ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:
Rthe
G WARNING
road speed and
The reversing feature does not react:
Rthe intensity of the rain.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
You can manually cancel the automatic clos-
ing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch gers
in any direction. Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-
To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the ually immediately after automatic reversing
3 switch in direction :. The rain-closing This means that the reversing feature cannot
feature remains activated. prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
Operating the roller sunblinds for the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:
Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
G WARNING switch briefly in any direction
When opening or closing the roller sunblind, The closing process is stopped.
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93
Opening and closing X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof
(Y page 91) and the roller sunblinds
(Y page 93) can be fully opened and closed
Opening and closing

again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Overhead control panel

: To open
; To open
= To close
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond
the point of resistance, automatic opera-
tion is started in the corresponding direc-
tion. You can stop automatic operation by
pressing/pulling the switch again.
i After opening the sliding sunroof, the
roller sunblind closes slightly automati-
cally. This reduces drafts in the vehicle inte-
rior.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the

roller sunblinds
If the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do
not move smoothly, reset the sliding sunroof
and the roller sunblinds:
ignition lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
Z
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Opening and closing
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
not be closed and you again slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-
ture.
95

Correct driver's seat position ............ 96
Seats .................................................... 97
Steering wheel .................................. 102
Mirrors ............................................... 103
Memory functions ............................. 105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

96 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-

erly.
i This Operator's manual describes all Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98)
models and all standard and optional equip- Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 99)
ment of your vehicle available at the time of When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be bag as possible.
equipped with all features described. This Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
also applies to safety-related systems and tion.
functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an

i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26). almost vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
that your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
G WARNING ted properly (Y page 99).
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do When doing so, make sure that you have
the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by the
steering wheel or mirrors center of the head restraint.
Rfasten the seat belt Observe the safety guidelines on steering
There is a risk of an accident. wheel adjustment (Y page 102).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt ted properly.
before starting the engine. Adjusting the steering wheel
(Y page 102)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 52).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 53).
Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-

ment (Y page 97).
Seats 97
The seat belt should: While moving the seats, make sure that your
Rfit snugly across your body hands or other body parts do not get under the
Rbe routed across the middle of your lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
shoulder tem.
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
G WARNING
hip joints
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) in
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
such a way that you have a good view of
road and traffic conditions. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one

has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
the seat and exterior mirror settings
G WARNING
(Y page 105).
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
Seats ing or in the event of an accident, you could
Important safety notes slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
G WARNING poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
Children could become trapped if they adjust injury.
the seats, particularly when unattended. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
There is a risk of injury. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
When leaving the vehicle, always take the is in an almost vertical position and that the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
the following while driving: ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
Radjust
as intended. There is an increased risk of
the driver's seat, head restraint,
injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
steering wheel or mirrors
event of an accident or when braking.
Rfasten the seat belt
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
There is a risk of an accident. led. Before driving off, make sure for every
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- vehicle occupant that the center of the head
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt restraint supports the back of the head at
before starting the engine. about eye level.
G WARNING G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or According to accident statistics, children are
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and safer when properly restrained on the rear
thereby injured. Children in particular could seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- we strongly recommend that children be
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
risk of injury. Regardless of seating position, children 12
Z
98 Seats
years old and under must be seated and prop- Adjusting the seats manually
erly secured in an appropriately sized child
restraint system or booster seat recommen-
ded for the size and weight of the child. For
additional information, see the "Children in
the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-
nificantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the
child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as or backwards.
soon as possible. X Release lever : again.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
switch on the seat heating. The seat position.
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Backrest angle
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section. X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Seat height
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible. X Pull handle = upwards or push it down
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
not cover the seats with insulating mate-
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats. Seat cushion angle
! Make sure that there are no objects in the Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
footwell under or behind the seats when supported.
moving the seats back. There is a risk that X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i Further related subjects:
Rcargo compartment enlargement (fold-
ing down the rear seats) (Y page 259)
Seats 99
Adjusting the seats electrically restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
General notes
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot
adjust the front head restraints or the outer
rear head restraints.
Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height
: Head restraint height1
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 105).
Adjusting the head restraints

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
G WARNING desired position.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do X To lower: press release catch : in the
the following while driving: direction of the arrow and push the head
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
1 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.
Z
100 Seats
With this function you can adjust the distance Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head. You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint support for your back.
forwards in the direction of the arrow until
it engages.
There are several notches.
X To move backwards: press and hold
release button : and push the head
restraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desired

position, release the button and make sure
that the head restraint is engaged in posi-
tion.
Adjusting the height of the head : To raise the backrest contour

restraints electrically ; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
? To harden the backrest contour
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 99) up or down in the direction of
the arrow .
AMG Performance Seat
Rear seat head restraints To adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint adjust the front seats.2
height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat
desired position. cushion
X To lower: press release catch : and push X To set the side bolsters of the seat
the head restraint down until it is in the cushion narrower: press button :.
desired position. X To set the side bolsters of the seat
cushion wider: press button ;.
2 Only in conjunction with electrically adjustable seats.

Seats 101
Adjusting the seat backrest side bol- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
sters ignition lock (Y page 141).
X To set the side bolsters of the seat X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
backrest narrower: press button =. until the desired heating level is set.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
backrest wider: press button ?. until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button

indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
Z
102 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering

wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
: Release lever
G WARNING ; To adjust the steering wheel height
Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment)
injury.
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.
G WARNING When doing so, try to push the steering
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the wheel up or down or try to move it in the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position fore-and-aft direction.
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Mirrors 103
Mirrors X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 141).
Rear-view mirror X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long

as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : should have a good overview of traffic con-
forwards or back. ditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
Exterior mirrors
After the engine has been started, the exte-
Adjusting the exterior mirrors rior mirrors are automatically heated at low
outside temperatures. Heating takes a maxi-
G WARNING mum of ten minutes.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
objects are actually closer than they appear. manually by switching on the rear window
This means that you could misjudge the dis- defroster.
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
dent. electrically
For this reason, always make sure of the This function is only available in Canada.
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

ignition lock (Y page 141).
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
Z
104 Mirrors
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are button (Y page 103) until you hear a click
always folded out fully while driving. They and then the mirrors engage in position.
could otherwise vibrate. The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (Y page 103).
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
Setting the exterior mirrors
The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
This function is only available in Canada.
only available if the vehicle is equipped with
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
the "Mirrors package".

pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
glare mode if:
rors when locking" function in the on-board
computer (Y page 210). Rthe ignition is switched on and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
tion lock (Y page 141). sensor in the rear-view mirror.
X Briefly press button :. The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
is switched on.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in Canada. Parking position for the exterior mir-
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function ror on the front-passenger side
is activated in the on-board computer General notes
(Y page 210):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as The "Parking position of the exterior mirror on
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- the front-passenger side" function is only
side. available if the vehicle is equipped with the
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
"Mirrors package".
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger Setting and storing the parking position
door. Using reverse gear
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in You can position the front-passenger side
manually, they do not fold out. exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
Exterior mirror pushed out of position engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
tion.
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
Memory functions 105
X Press memory button M ? and one of the

arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141).
tion lock (Y page 141). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on passenger side with the corresponding but-
the front-passenger side. ton (Y page 103).
X Engage reverse gear. X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position. side moves to the stored parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
exterior mirror. You should see the rear side moves back to its original position:
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror. Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
The parking position is stored. (15 km/h)
i If you shift the transmission to another Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
position, the exterior mirror on the front- gaged reverse gear
passenger side returns to the driving posi- Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
tion. ror on the driver's side
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger side Memory functions
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you Storing settings
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. side while driving, you could lose control of
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
tion lock (Y page 141). being made. There is a risk of an accident.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on Only use the memory function on the driver's
the front-passenger side. side when the vehicle is stationary.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror. You should see the rear G WARNING
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror. When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
Z
106 Memory functions
While the memory function is making adjust- Calling up a stored setting

ments, make sure that no one has any body
X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and
becomes trapped, immediately release the
exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
memory function position button. The adjust-
ment process is stopped. i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
G WARNING button.
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.

With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
ferent people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 99).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
side (Y page 103).
X Briefly press the M memory button and
then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3
within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
107
Useful information ............................ 108

Exterior lighting ................................ 108
Interior lighting ................................. 113
Replacing bulbs ................................. 114
Windshield wipers ............................ 118
Lights and windshield wipers

108 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
i This Operator's manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using:
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 110)
Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 208)
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch
functions.
Operation
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps
gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
Conversion to symmetrical low beam led by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country C N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents fog lamps)
glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
as widely and as far ahead as normal.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as The exterior lighting (except the parking/
possible before driving in these countries. standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
after returning Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
Have the headlamps converted back to asym- position 0.

metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible after
crossing the border again.
Exterior lighting 109
Automatic headlamp mode If the engine is running and you turn the light
G WARNING switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on Low-beam headlamps
automatically if there is fog, snow or other Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
causes of poor visibility due to the weather is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an headlamps switch on when the ignition is
accident. switched on and the light switch is set to the
In such situations, turn the light switch to L position. This is a particularly useful
L. function in the event of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's

position 2 or start the engine.
lighting at all times.
X Turn the light switch to L.
Ã is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected accord- The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ing to the brightness of the ambient light ment cluster lights up.
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con- Front fog lamps
ditions such as fog, snow or spray):
In conditions where visibility is poor due to
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis-
the parking lamps are switched on or off ibility as well as making it easier for other road
automatically depending on the brightness users to see you. They can be operated
of the ambient light. together with the parking lamps or together
RWith the engine running: if you have acti- with the parking lamps and low-beam head-
vated the daytime running lamps function lamps.
via the on-board computer, the daytime X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn
running lamps or the low-beam headlamps
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
and parking lamps are switched on or off
2 or start the engine.
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the N button.
X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
The daytime running lamps improve the visi- X To switch off the front fog lamps: press
bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-
the N button.
time running lamps function is required by law
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
in Canada.
ment cluster goes out.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from Only vehicles with front fog lamps are equip-
a drive position to P, the daytime running ped with the "fog lamp" function; information
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after on the fog lamp function for vehicles with
three minutes. Intelligent Light System (Y page 112).
When the engine is running, the vehicle is Rear fog lamp
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
turn the light switch to T, the daytime vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
running lamps and parking lamps switch on. thick fog. Please take note of the country-
Z
specific regulations for the use of rear fog Combination switch

lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
Turn signal
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.

: High-beam headlamps
i When the rear fog lamp is switched on,
the center brake lamp in the tail lamp
; Turn signal, right
switches off due to a legal requirement. = High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
Parking lamps
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
! If the battery has been excessively dis- switch briefly to the pressure point in the
charged, the parking lamps or standing direction of arrow ; or ?.
lamps are automatically switched off to The corresponding turn signal flashes three
enable the next engine start. Always park times.
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
X To indicate: press the combination switch
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction
for several hours. If possible, switch on the of arrow ; or ?.
X right or the W left standing lamp.
High-beam headlamps
X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru- X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
ment cluster lights up. turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
Standing lamps X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the X Press the combination switch beyond the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
ted.
In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
X To switch on the standing lamps: the lamps are only switched on when it is dark
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in and the engine is running.
position 0. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of headlamps are switched on.
the vehicle). X To switch off the high-beam head-
lamps: move the combination switch back
to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Exterior lighting 111
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it the ignition is switched off.
controls activation of the high-beam head-
lamps (Y page 112).
Cornering light function
High-beam flasher
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps
The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
The hazard warning lamps automatically
Rif you are driving at speeds between
switch on if:
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
Ran air bag is deployed or and turn the steering wheel
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) or switch off the turn sig-
comes to a standstill nal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: ahead position
press button :. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a time, but is automatically switched off after
turn signal using the combination switch, no more than three minutes.
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
Z
Extended range fog lamps
The extended range fog lamps reduce the

glare experienced by the driver and improve

the illumination of the edge of the road.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear
fog lamp.
Not active: if, following activation, you are Important safety notes
driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)
or if you switch off the rear fog lamp. G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
General notes Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
You can use this function to set the head- Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
lamps to change between low beam and high In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
beam automatically. The system recognizes may fail to recognize other road users that
vehicles with their lights on, either approach- have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
ing from the opposite direction or traveling in this or similar situations, the automatic high-
front of your vehicle, and consequently beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
switches the headlamps from high beam to activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-
low beam. dent.
The system automatically adapts the low- Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system good time.
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
The system's optical sensor is located behind account road, weather or traffic conditions.
the windshield near the overhead control Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
panel. are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
Interior lighting 113
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Headlamps fogged up on the inside

be restricted if there is:
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
snow moisture does not affect the functionality of
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are the headlamp.
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting

on/off
Overview of interior lighting
X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display lights up when it is dark and the
light sensor activates the low-beam head-
lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users. Front overhead control panel
If you are driving at speeds above approx- : p To switch the left-hand front reading
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other lamp on/off
road users have been detected: ; c To switch the front interior lighting
The high-beam headlamps are switched on on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in = v To switch the on/off
the instrument cluster also lights up. ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
If you are driving at speeds below approx- automatic interior lighting control off
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road A p To switch the right-hand front read-
users have been detected or the roads are ing lamp on/off
adequately lit: B To switch the automatic interior lighting
The high-beam headlamps are switched off control on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Z
114 Replacing bulbs
Manual interior lighting control

X To switch the front interior lighting on:
set the switch to the c position.
X To switch the interior lighting off: set the
switch to the | position or (if the door is
closed) to the center position.
X To switch the interior lighting on/off:
press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
; p To switch the right-hand reading
Crash-responsive emergency lighting

lamp on/off
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Interior lighting control X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
Important notes
warning lamp button.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from or
discharging, the interior lighting functions are X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
automatically deactivated after some time key.
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The brightness of the ambient lighting may be Replacing bulbs
set using the on-board computer
(Y page 208). Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
Automatic interior lighting control
X To switch on: set the switch to center G DANGER
position B. Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
X To switch off: set the switch to the | the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-
position. tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
The interior lighting automatically switches Never touch the parts or the electrical con-
on if you: tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
Runlock the vehicle the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
Ropen
cialist workshop.
a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
lock. you can recognize this by the following: the
The interior light is activated for a short while cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- from the top to the bottom and back again
tion lock. You can activate this delayed when you start the engine. For this to be
switch-off using the on-board computer observed, the lights must be switched on
(Y page 209). before starting the engine.
Replacing bulbs 115
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of that these function correctly at all times.
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
Other bulbs You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
G WARNING type can be found in the legend.
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before

changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it Vehicles with halogen headlamps
Rit is hot : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Ryou drop it ; Low-beam headlamp/daytime running
Ryou scratch it lamp/parking lamp/standing lamp:
H15 55 W/15 W
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare = Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps
that you cannot replace. Replace only the : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
bulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
Z
116 Replacing bulbs
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

: Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
; Brake lamp: W 16 W
X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-
= Brake lamp: W 16 W
ing (Y page 116).
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
A Backup lamp: W 16 W and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
Changing the front bulbs
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Removing and installing the cover in the X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
front wheel housing X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
You must remove the cover from the front it clockwise.
wheel housing before you can change the X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
front bulbs. wise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-
ing (Y page 116).
High-beam headlamps/daytime run-

ning lamps/parking lamps/standing
lamps (vehicles with halogen head-
lamps)
X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
X Push cover ; down.
X To install: push cover ; up.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked. X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
Replacing bulbs 117
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise X Switch off the lights.

and pull it out. X Open the hood.
X Turn bulb ; counter-clockwise and pull it X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
out. and pull it out.
X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
stop. pull it out.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
wise until it engages. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
Turn signals (halogen headlamps) it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
You must open the side trim panel in the trunk
before you can change the bulbs in the tail
lamps.
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon

headlamps) Example: right-hand side trim panel
X To open: release right or left side trim
panel : at the top and fold it down in the
direction of the arrow.
X To close: insert side panel :.
Tail lamp
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 117).
Z
118 Windshield wipers
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
X Press retaining clips : at the same time in
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
the direction of the arrows.
use washer fluid when operating the wind-
X Carefully remove the bulb holder with the

shield wipers.
contacted connectors and the bulbs.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
Bulb holder
: Brake lamp
; Brake lamp
= Rear fog lamp
? Backup Light
A Turn signal
X Brake lamp/rear fog lamp/backup Combination switch
lamp: remove the corresponding bulb from 1 $ Windshield wiper off
the bulb holder. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. set to low sensitivity)
X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulb
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clock-
wise and remove it from bulb holder. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
turn it clockwise. B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind-
X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on
shield using washer fluid
retaining clips :. X Switch on the ignition.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 117). X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
Windshield wipers 119
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- windshield may be damaged by the force of
shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi- the impact.
tions, the windshield wipers may be activa- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
ted inadvertently. This could then damage the wiper blades changed at a qualified
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the specialist workshop.
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch Changing the windshield wiper blades
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Removing the wiper blades
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
Å position, the appropriate wiping fre-
quency is automatically set according to the lock.
intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä shield.

position, causing the windshield wipers to
wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNING X Press both release clips ;.
If the windshield wipers begin to move while X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
you are changing the wiper blades, you could arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
injury. arrow A.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades. Installing the wiper blades
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
Z
120 Windshield wipers
X Position new wiper blade : with recess B

on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
Windshield wipers 121
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the center of the wind-
shield.
Z
122
123

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 124
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 129
Setting the air vents ......................... 136
Climate control
124 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period

during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
i This Operator's manual describes all venience opening feature (Y page 88). This
models and all standard and optional equip- will speed up the cooling process and the
ment of your vehicle available at the time of desired interior temperature will be
publication of the Operator's manual. reached more quickly.
Country-specific differences are possible. i The integrated filter filters out most par-
Please note that your vehicle may not be ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
equipped with all features described. This ters out pollen. With dual-zone automatic
also applies to safety-related systems and climate control, gaseous pollutants and
functions. odors will also be reduced. A clogged filter
i Read the information on qualified special- reduces the amount of air supplied to the
ist workshops (Y page 26). vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing
the filter, which is specified in the Mainte-
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems nance Booklet. As it depends on environ-

mental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution,
Important safety notes the interval may be shorter than stated in
Observe the settings recommended on the the Maintenance Booklet.
following pages. The windows could other- i It is possible that the residual heat func-
wise fog up. tion may be activated automatically an hour
To prevent the windows from fogging up: after the SmartKey has been removed in
Rswitch off climate control only briefly order to dry the air-conditioning system.
The vehicle is then ventilated for
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
30 minutes.
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The climate control/dual-zone automatic
control regulates the temperature and the
humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out
undesirable substances from the air.
Climate control/dual-zone automatic climate
control is only operational when the engine is
running. Optimum operation is only achieved
with the side windows and panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 135).
Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment
clear (Y page 117). Otherwise the vehicle will
not be ventilated correctly.
Overview of climate control systems 125
Control panel for climate control
Climate control
USA only
: To set the temperature (Y page 131)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)
= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)
? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)
A To set the airflow (Y page 132)
B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)
Canada only
: To set the temperature (Y page 131)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)
= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)
126 Overview of climate control systems
? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)

A To set the airflow (Y page 132)
B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)
Optimum use of climate control when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
Automatic climate control into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
The following contains notes and recommen- RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the
dations on optimum use of climate control. settings of the climate control system, the
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by climate status display appears for three
turning control knob A clockwise to the seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
desired position (except position 0). COMAND display. See also the separate
COMAND operating instructions. You will
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
Climate control
see the current settings of the various cli-

RRecommendation for avoiding misted
mate control functions.
windows at low exterior temperatures
or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with ECO start/stop function
dehumidification function (Y page 129).
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
switch off P and O (Y page 132). mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
In air-recirculation mode, switch e off
mate control output, you can switch off the
(Y page 135).
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
Set airflow control A to a setting between button (Y page 144).
3 and 6 (Y page 132).
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
airflow control A to a setting between 3
and 6 (Y page 132).
RRecommendation for a constant vehi-
cle interior temperature: set airflow con-
trol A to a setting between 1 and 3
(Y page 132).
RRecommendation for air distribution in
the winter: set O and ¯
(Y page 132).
Recommendation for air distribution in
the summer: set P or P and ¯
(Y page 132).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
Overview of climate control systems 127
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
USA only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131)
; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)
= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)
? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)
A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)
B Display
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)
E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)
F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 133)
G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)
H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)
I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)
J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)
128
Climate control Overview of climate control systems
Canada only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131)
; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)
= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)
? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)
A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)
B Display
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)
E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)
F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 135)
G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)
H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)
I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)
J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)
Notes on using dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
climate control tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
The following contains instructions and rec- if there are unpleasant outside odors or
ommendations to enable you to get the most when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
out of your dual-control automatic climate erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
control. into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the perature settings on the driver's side for
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). cator lamp in the á button goes out.
Operating the climate control systems 129
ROnly available on vehicles for Canada: Dual-zone automatic climate control

use the residual heat function if you want to
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
tion lock (Y page 141).
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deac- X To activate: press the Ã button.
tivated with the ignition switched off. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for three or
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the X Press the ^ button.
COMAND display. See also the separate The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
COMAND operating instructions. You will out. The previously selected settings are
see the current settings of the various cli- restored.
mate control functions. X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
ECO start/stop function up.
Climate control
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- i Dual-zone automatic climate control:
mate control system only operates at a switch on climate control primarily using
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli- the Ã button.
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 144). Activating/deactivating cooling with
air dehumidification
Operating the climate control sys- General notes
tems If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
Switching climate control on/off midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
General notes cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
When the climate control is switched off, the dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only
air supply and air circulation are also deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-
switched off. The windows could fog up. cation" function briefly.
Therefore, switch off climate control only The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
briefly tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
Climate control dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Condensation may drip from the underside of
tion lock (Y page 141). the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
the desired position (except position 0) tion.
(Y page 125).
X To switch off: turn control A counter-
clockwise to position 0 (Y page 125).
130 Operating the climate control systems
X To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation" function cannot
be switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the

É or Ë button.
General notes or
Climate control
The automatic function is only available in X Press the K or I button.
conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
control. out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
In automatic mode, the set temperature is are deactivated.
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and Setting the temperature
the air distribution.
Climate control
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" You can set the temperature for the entire
function is activated. If necessary, cooling vehicle.
with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- tion lock (Y page 141).
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- X To increase/reduce: turn control :
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
clockwise or counter-clockwise
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
(Y page 125). Only change the temperature
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-
(22 †).
cation" function briefly.
Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Different temperatures can be set for the
tion lock (Y page 141). driver's and front-passenger sides.
X Set the desired temperature. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X To activate: press the Ã button. tion lock (Y page 141).
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights X To increase/reduce: turn control : or E
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow clockwise or counter-clockwise
are activated. (Y page 127). Only change the temperature
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Setting the air distribution Setting the air distribution

Climate control tion lock (Y page 141).
Air distribution settings X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents until the desired symbol appears in the dis-
play.
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air Setting the airflow
vents
Climate control
i You can also activate several air distribu-
tion settings simultaneously. To do this, X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
press multiple air distribution buttons. The tion lock (Y page 141).
air is then directed through various vents. X To increase/reduce: turn control A
Setting the air distribution clockwise or counter-clockwise

Climate control
(Y page 125).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up tion lock (Y page 141).
briefly. X To increase/reduce: press the K or
I button.
Air distribution settings Switching the ZONE function on/off
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
This function is only available with dual-zone
P Directs air through the center and side automatic climate control.
air vents
X To activate: press the á button.
O Directs air through the footwell air
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
vents
up.
b Directs air through the defroster, cen-
The temperature setting for the driver's
ter and side air vents
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
a Directs air through the defroster and side.
footwell vents
X To deactivate: press the á button.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, The indicator lamp in the á button goes
airflow is always directed through the side out.
air vents. The side air vents can only be The temperature setting for the driver's
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise side is adopted for the front-passenger
until they engage. side.
Defrosting the windshield or

X Climate control: turn temperature con-
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
trol : clockwise or counter-clockwise
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
(Y page 125).
shield and the side windows.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
i You should only select the "Windshield temperature control : or E clockwise or
defrosting" function until the windshield is counter-clockwise (Y page 127).
clear again.
tion lock (Y page 141). MAX COOL maximum cooling
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The MAX COOL function is only available in
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights vehicles for the USA.
up. MAX COOL is only operational when the
The climate control system switches to the engine is running.
following functions:
X To activate: press the Ù button.
Climate control
Rhighairflow The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Rhightemperature X To deactivate: press the Ù button
Rair distribution to the windshield and again.
front side windows The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
Rair-recirculation mode off selected settings are restored.
i The "Windshield defrosting" function When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-
automatically sets the blower output to the trol switches to the following functions:
optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the Rmaximum cooling
airflow may increase or decrease automat-
Rmaximum airflow
ically after the button is pressed.
Rair-recirculation mode on
i You can adjust the blower output man-
ually while the "Windshield defrosting"
function is in operation: Defrosting the windows
RClimate control: turn airflow control A
clockwise or counter-clockwise Windows fogged up on the inside
(Y page 125). Climate control
RDual-zone automatic climate control:
X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
press the ó or ô button.
midification" function.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
deactivated.
or
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.

X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i You should only select this setting until
Windows fogged up on the outside

XActivate the windshield wipers.
XSet the air distribution to P or O.
i You should only select this setting until
Climate control
Rear window defroster

General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
ted prematurely or can- lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recircula- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-

tion mode matically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
General notes
side temperatures below approximately
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if 41 ‡ (5 †)
Climate control
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Rafter approximately five minutes if the
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
cle will then be recirculated. tion is deactivated
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- side temperatures above approximately
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows midification" function is activated
from fogging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating the residual
heat function
General notes
tion lock (Y page 141). The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
X To activate: press the e button.
climate control.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
up.
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
matically at high outside temperatures. has been switched off. The heating time
When air-recirculation mode is activated depends on the set interior temperature.
automatically, the indicator lamp in the i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
e button is not lit. Outside air is added less of the airflow setting.
after about 30 minutes.
i If you activate the residual heat function
X To deactivate: press the e button.
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
will be activated. The blower runs at
out.
medium speed.
136 Setting the air vents
i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
vehicle interior to a temperature lower than open the air vents completely and set the
the outside temperature. adjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
tion lock or remove it (Y page 141).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
i Residual heat is deactivated automati-
Climate control
cally:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes X To open the center air vent: turn the
Rwhen the ignition is switched on adjuster in one of center air vents : coun-
Rif the battery voltage drops ter-clockwise.
X To close the center air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
Setting the air vents wise as far as it will go.
G WARNING Setting the side air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes: : Side window defroster vent
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield ; Side air vent
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
snow or leaves. in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in the vehicle interior. in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will
i You can move the adjusters for the air go.
vents vertically or horizontally to set the
direction of the airflow.
Setting the air vents 137
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
Climate control
= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
XTo open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
i If the control panel in the front is switched
off, no air can flow through the rear air
vents.
Z
138
139

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
............................................................. 140
Driving ............................................... 140
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 146
Refueling ............................................ 155
Parking ............................................... 157
Driving tips ........................................ 160
Driving systems ................................ 166
140 Driving
Useful information RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.
i This Operator's manual describes all RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
models and all standard and optional equip- pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of down).
Driving and parking
publication of the Operator's manual. RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
Country-specific differences are possible. drive in program E.
Please note that your vehicle may not be After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can
equipped with all features described. This increase the engine speed gradually and bring
also applies to safety-related systems and the vehicle to full speed.
functions.
Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-
i Read the information on qualified special- cles:
ist workshops (Y page 26). RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
Important safety notes engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
The sensor system of some driving and driv-
ing safety systems adjusts automatically i You should also observe these notes on
while a certain distance is being driven after breaking-in if the engine or parts of the
the vehicle has been delivered or after drive train on your vehicle have been
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not replaced.
reached until the end of this teach-in proce-
dure. i Always observe the respective speed lim-
its.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
Driving
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Important safety notes
G WARNING
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The more you look after the engine when it is
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
performance in the future.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
cle and engine speeds for the first the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
1000 miles (1500 km). securely and as specified in order to ensure
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
tle, during this period. loose floormats and do not place floormats on
RChange gear in good time, before the tach- top of one another.
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the tachometer.
Driving 141
G WARNING Key positions

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
Driving and parking

Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, g To remove the SmartKey
safety-relevant functions are only available (shift the transmission to position P)
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
for example, the power steering and the brake as the windshield wipers
boosting effect. You will require considerably 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk and drive position
of an accident. 3 To start the engine
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-
G WARNING tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-
Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not
If the parking brake has not been fully
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function. Starting the engine
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release Important safety notes
the parking brake fully before driving off.
G WARNING
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
the engine's full performance until it has gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
reached operating temperature. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
Only shift the automatic transmission to is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the desired drive position when the vehicle the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
is stationary. out sufficient ventilation.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery G WARNING
roads. You could otherwise damage the Flammable materials introduced through
drive train. environmental influence or by animals can
! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
when the engine is cold. This helps to proof fire.
tect the engine and avoids uncomfortable Carry out regular checks to make sure that
driving. there are no flammable foreign materials in
Z
142 Driving
the engine compartment or in the exhaust X Release the brake pedal.

system. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The electric parking brake is automatically
! Do not depress the accelerator when released (Y page 158).
starting the engine. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
Driving and parking
i During a cold start, the engine runs at only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
higher speeds to enable the catalytic con- ter goes out.
verter to reach its operating temperature.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
The sound of the engine may change during
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
this time.
drop down.
Automatic transmission You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
X Shift the transmission to position P. You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
Transmission position display P is shown in ing feature (Y page 209).
the multifunction display.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
i When the transmission is in position N, speeds after a cold start. This helps the
you can also start the engine with the brake catalytic converter to reach its operating
pedal depressed. temperature more quickly.
Starting procedure Hill start assist

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
tion lock (Y page 141) and release it as forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
soon as the engine is running. holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
Pulling away from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
Automatic transmission roll.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission G WARNING
from position P to the desired position if After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
you depress the brake pedal. Only then can ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
the parking lock be deactivated. If you do There is a risk of an accident and injury.
not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
SELECT lever can still be moved but the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
parking lock remains engaged. leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
i At transmission fluid temperatures below assist.
Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park
position P into another transmission posi- X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
tion when the engine is running. The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Pull away.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
Driving 143
Hill start assist is not active if: function switches the engine off automati-
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a cally if the vehicle stops moving.
downhill gradient. The stop/start function is automatically acti-
Rthe transmission is in position N. vated each time you start the engine with the
SmartKey.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
Driving and parking

If the ECO start/stop function has been man-
RESP® is malfunctioning.
ually deactivated (Y page 144) or a malfunc-
Further information on holding the vehicle tion has caused the system to be deactivated,
stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 149). the ¤ symbol is not displayed.
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
is only available in drive program C.
Introduction Automatic engine switch-off
The ECO start/stop function switches the General notes
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- The ECO start/stop function is operational
ped under certain conditions. and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
The engine starts automatically when the the multifunction display, if:
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
start/stop function thereby helps you to
green.
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
of your vehicle.
that is suitable for the system.
Important safety notes Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
ature.
G WARNING Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
If the engine is switched off automatically and has been reached.
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. Rthe system detects that the windshield is
There is a risk of accident and injury.
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off system is switched on.
the ignition and secure the vehicle against Rthe hood is closed.
rolling away.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
General notes
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is
shown in yellow.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped auto-
matically.
i The engine can be switched off automat-
: ECO start/stop display ically a maximum of four times (first stop
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the and three subsequent stops) in succession.
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display after the engine has
Z
144 Driving
been started automatically for the fourth i Shifting the transmission to position P
time. When the ¤ symbol is shown in does not start the engine.
green in the multifunction display, auto-
matic engine switch-off is again possible. i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
Vehicles with automatic transmission again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
Driving and parking
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, green in the multifunction display.

the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
stop function
i The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off automati-
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic
stop phase. When you depress the accel-
erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
cally and the braking effect of the HOLD
function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start

General notes
The engine starts automatically if: X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
the multifunction display go out.
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou engage reverse gear R. X To activate: press ECO button :.
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
driver's door. If all conditions for automatic engine
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
switch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-
Rthe brake system requires this.
tifunction display.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
If not all conditions for automatic engine
ates from the set range. switch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
shield when the air-conditioning system is tifunction display. If this is the case, the
switched on. ECO start/stop function is not available.
Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
Vehicles with automatic transmission stop function has been deactivated man-
The engine is started automatically if you: ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
Rrelease
engine will then not be switched off auto-
the brake pedal in transmission
matically when the vehicle stops.
position D or N when the HOLD function is
not active.
Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
Rmove the transmission out of position P.
Driving 145
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 176) or DISTRONIC
Driving and parking

PLUS (Y page 168).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 305).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Z
146 Automatic transmission

The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
ning smoothly and is component of the engine management system.
misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 248 ‡ X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
(120 †). The coolant cool down.
warning lamp may also X
Check the coolant level (Y page 285). Observe the warning
be lit and a warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
tone may sound.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the
If the engine speed is above the idling speed DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
and you engage transmission position D or R, steering column.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is For information on the selector lever in AMG
a risk of an accident. vehicles (Y page 148).
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- j Park position with parking lock
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
k Reverse gear
brake.
i Neutral
h Drive
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current trans-
mission position P, R, N or D appears in the
Automatic transmission 147
transmission position display (Y page 147) i The automatic transmission shifts into
in the multifunction display. park position P automatically:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
Transmission position and drive pro- vehicle is stationary in transmission posi-
gram display tion D or R
Driving and parking

The current transmission position and drive Rif you open the door while traveling at
program appear in the multifunction display. very low speeds in transmission position
D or R
In addition, a warning tone sounds and a
display message is shown.
i Depressing the brake and pushing the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen-
gages the parking lock. The transmission is
: Transmission position display
in N neutral.
; Drive program display At transmission fluid temperatures below
Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park
i The arrows in the transmission position position P into another transmission posi-
display show how and into which transmis- tion when the engine is running.
sion positions you can change using the In order to shift from park position P
DIRECT SELECT lever. directly into R or D:
! If the transmission position display in the Rdepress the brake pedal and
multifunction display is not working, you
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
should pull away carefully to check whether
down past the first point of resistance
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select trans- ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
mission position D and drive program E or cle is moving, do not shift the automatic
S. transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. The automatic transmis-
Engaging park position P sion could otherwise be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
Engaging reverse gear R
tion of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R
the multifunction display. when the vehicle is stationary.
i When you engage park position P, make i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
sure that the transmission position display able when reverse gear is engaged.
shows P in the multifunction display. Further information on the ECO start/stop
function (Y page 143).
i You can only engage park position P when
the vehicle is stationary. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
Z
Shifting to neutral N Engaging drive position D

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal. brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
to the first point of resistance. the first point of resistance.
Driving and parking
If the engine has been switched off, the auto-

matic transmission automatically shifts to N.
Selector lever
Remaining in neutral N
If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
washes with a towing device, please observe
the following instructions:
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. j Park position with parking lock
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in k Reverse gear
motion if, for example, they: i Neutral
Rrelease the parking brake. h Drive
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
Transmission position and drive pro-
park position P
gram display
RStart the engine.
reach of children.
RMake
Example
sure that the ignition is switched on.
: Transmission position display
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
; Drive program display
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
RShift to neutral N. The current transmission position and drive
RRelease the brake pedal.
program appear in the multifunction display.
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Engaging park position P A Neutral

No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
Driving and parking

push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to posi-
tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
When you switch off the engine, the
X When the vehicle is stationary, press P but- automatic transmission automati-
ton :. cally shifts into neutral N.
7 Drive
The automatic transmission
Transmission positions changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
B Park position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P (Y page 157) unless the Driving tips
vehicle is stationary. The parking
lock should not be used as a brake Changing gear
when parking. Always apply the
electronic parking brake in addi- The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
tion to the parking lock in order to vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
secure the vehicle. mission position D. This automatic gearshift-
ing behavior is determined by:
If the vehicle electronics are mal-
functioning, the transmission may Rthe selected drive program (Y page 150)
be locked in position P. Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Have the vehicle electronics (Y page 149)
checked immediately at a qualified Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R Your style of driving influences how the auto-
when the vehicle is stationary. matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill

gradients
G WARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
agement system is automatically deactivated.
Z
This interrupts the power transmission. The Rocking the vehicle free
vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
gradients. There is a risk of an accident. gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-
gradients by depressing the accelerator. cle's engine management system limits the
Driving and parking
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when

The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi- shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth
cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress- between transmission positions D and R,
ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over- move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever up
heats, a warning tone sounds. and down past the point of resistance.
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the
Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine
Running display message appears in the mul- Program selector button
tifunction display. You will only be able to
continue your journey once the clutch has General notes
cooled down and the display message in the The program selector button allows you to
multifunction display has disappeared. choose between drive programs with differ-
AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil Overhea‐ ent driving characteristics.
ted Drive on with Care display message
appears in the multifunction display.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary
on uphill gradients by:
Rdepressing the brake pedal
Ractivatingthe HOLD function
Rengaging the electric parking brake
Kickdown Example: program selector button

AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick- E Economy Comfortable, economical
down in temporary manual drive program M. driving
For further information on manual drive pro-
gram M (Y page 152). S Sport Sporty driving style
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. M Manual Manual gear shifting
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point. Only change from automatic drive program E
The automatic transmission shifts to a or S to manual drive program M when the
lower gear depending on the engine speed. vehicle is stationary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
X Press program selector button : repeat-
desired speed is reached. edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
The automatic transmission shifts back up. program appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
i The automatic transmission shifts to Steering wheel paddle shifters

automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 151).
Driving and parking

AMG vehicles
: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts

down)
; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts
up)
In drive program M, you can change gear
yourself using the steering wheel paddle shift-
ers.
C Controlled Comfortable, economical
If you pull the left or right steering wheel pad-
Efficiency driving
dle shifter when in automatic drive program E
S Sport Sporty driving style (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S, the
automatic transmission shifts into drive pro-
M Manual Manual gear shifting gram M for a limited time. Depending on
which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic
Only change from automatic drive program C transmission immediately shifts into the next
or S to manual drive program M when the gear down or up.
vehicle is stationary. AMG vehicles: you can activate drive pro-
X Press program selector button : repeat- gram M RACE START (Y page 177) using the
edly until the letter for the desired gearshift steering wheel paddle shifters.
program appears in the multifunction dis-
i You can only change gear with the steer-
play.
ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-
i The automatic transmission shifts to mission is in position D.
automatic drive program C each time the i For further information on the manual
engine is started. drive program, see (Y page 152).
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 151).
Automatic drive program
Drive program E (drive program C on MAG
vehicles) is characterized by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner
Z
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in 5 You can use the braking effect of
forward and reverse gears, unless the the engine on downhill gradients
accelerator pedal is depressed fully and for driving:
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
Ron steep mountain roads
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
Driving and parking
example Rin mountainous terrain

Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Rin arduous conditions
sooner. This results in the vehicle being 4 To use the braking effect of the
driven at lower engine speeds and the engine on extremely steep downhill
wheels being less likely to spin gradients and on long downhill
Drive program S is characterized by the fol- stretches
lowing:
Rsporty engine settings Switching on the manual drive program
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Activating permanently
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
X Press the program selector button
(Y page 150) repeatedly until M appears in
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points the multifunction display.
Manual drive program M remains active
until drive program E (drive program C on
Manual drive program AMG vehicles) or S is selected.
Activating temporarily
Introduction
X Pull the right or left steering wheel paddle
In manual drive program M, you can change shifter (Y page 151).
gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad- M is shown in the multifunction display.
dle shifters. For this, the transmission must Manual drive program M is temporarily
be in position D. The gear currently selected
active. Depending on which paddle shifter
and engaged is shown in the multifunction is pulled, the automatic transmission
display. immediately shifts into the next gear down
Manual drive program M differs from drive or up.
programs E (drive program C on AMG vehi-
cles) and S with regard to spontaneity, i When manual drive program M is activa-
responsiveness and smoothness of gear ted via the steering wheel paddle shifters,
changes. the temporarily active manual drive pro-
gram M will be deactivated automatically
Gear Driving situations after a limited time, if the driving situation
= You can use the engine's braking permits. The automatic transmission
effect switches to the previously activated drive
program E (drive program C on AMG vehi-
cles) or S. When driving on downhill gradi-
ents, the temporarily active manual drive
program M will only be deactivated if the
accelerator pedal is depressed while the
vehicle is rolling downhill.
Upshifting AMG vehicles

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle ! In manual drive program M, the automatic
shifter (Y page 151). transmission does not shift up automati-
The automatic transmission shifts up to the cally even when the engine limiting speed
next gear. for the current gear is reached. When the
Driving and parking

engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel
i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): in supply is cut to prevent the engine from
order to prevent engine damage the auto- overrevving. Always make sure that the
matic transmission automatically shifts up: engine speed does not reach the red area of
Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur- the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
rently engaged gear is reached and engine damage.
Ryou continue to accelerate.
AMG vehicles:
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automati-
cally even when the engine limiting speed
for the current gear is reached. When the
engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel : Gear indicator
supply is cut to prevent the engine from ; Upshift indicator
overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-
engine damage. tifunction display.
X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-
Shift recommendation tion display changes to red and the UP dis-
play message is shown, shift up a gear.
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction Downshifting
display. X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 151).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If you slow down or stop without shifting
down, the automatic transmission auto-
matically shifts down.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
to gearshift recommendation : when hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
shown in the multifunction display of the transmission selects the optimum gear for
instrument cluster. the current speed.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
Z
Kickdown
AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick-
down in temporary manual drive program M.
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
Driving and parking
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
i During kickdown, you cannot shift gears
using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
i If you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Switching off the manual drive program

X Press the program selector button
(Y page 150) repeatedly until E (drive pro-
gram C in AMG vehicles) or S appears in the
multifunction display.
Deactivating the temporary manual drive
program
X Pull and hold the right steering wheel pad-
dle shifter until the automatic transmission
shifts into the last active automatic drive
program E (drive program C on AMG vehi-
cles) or S.
i When manual drive program M is deacti-

vated, the automatic transmission in auto-
matic drive program E (drive program C on
AMG vehicles) or S may shift from the cur-
rent gear into a higher or lower gear. This is
dependent on the position of the accelera-
tor pedal, speed and load.
Refueling 155
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no X Shift the transmission to position P.
longer shifts into all of
X Switch off the engine.
the gears.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
Reverse gear can no
X Shift the transmission to position D.
longer be engaged.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Refueling clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
G WARNING tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel ing.
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- RImmediately change out of clothing which
sion. has come into contact with fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine G WARNING
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
refueling. ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
G WARNING Always touch the vehicle body before opening
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
There is a risk of injury. nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
You must make sure that fuel does not come thereby discharged.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
observe the following:
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
RWash away fuel from skin immediately wrong fuel could result in damage to the
using soap and water. fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
immediately rinse them thoroughly with tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Z
156 Refueling
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the X Switch the engine off.
fuel system. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted lock.
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
paintwork. arrow :.
Driving and parking
The fuel filler flap swings up.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
and remove it.
system could be blocked by particles from
X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on the
the fuel can.
inside of fuel filler flap =.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
charge could build up again.
and refuel.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
switches off.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 348).
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Refueling
Closing the fuel filler flap
General information
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- clockwise until it engages audibly.
matically when you open or close the vehicle X Close the fuel filler flap.
with the SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on vehicle.
the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi- i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
cle. open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the multi-
Opening the fuel filler flap function display (Y page 231).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 251).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 251).
: To open the fuel filler flap

; Tire pressure table
= To insert the fuel filler cap
? Fuel type to be used
Parking 157
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately
and remove it (Y page 141).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
Parking G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
G WARNING Rrelease the parking brake.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with parking position P.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
Rstart the engine.
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
an accident and injury.
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain When leaving the vehicle, always take the
fields. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
! Always secure the vehicle correctly

against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
Z
158 Parking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
rolling away unintentionally: tion lock and remove it.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. The immobilizer is activated.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and i If you switch the engine off with the trans-
the transmission position display must mission in position R or D, the automatic
Driving and parking
show P. transmission shifts to N automatically.

Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the If you then open one of the front doors or
ignition lock. remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front automatic transmission shifts to P.
wheels must be turned towards the curb. If you shift the automatic transmission to N
before switching off the engine, the auto-
matic transmission remains in N even if a
Switching off the engine door is opened.
Important safety notes i The automatic transmission shifts to P
automatically if you:
G WARNING
Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine. and remove the SmartKey from the igni-
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an tion lock or
accident. Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
After switching off the engine, always switch and open a front door.
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- If you attempt to turn off the engine when the
cle from rolling away by applying the parking selector lever is not in position P:
brake. Ra message appears in the multifunction dis-
play
Vehicles with automatic transmission Ra warning signal sounds
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
X Apply the electric parking brake. Electric parking brake
X Shift the transmission to position P.
General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
AMG vehicles: an accident and injury.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Press button :.
Parking 159
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Releasing

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Pull handle :.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
The function of the electric parking brake is ter goes out.
Driving and parking

dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction i You can only release the electric parking
in the system, it may not be possible to apply brake when the SmartKey is in position 1 or
the released parking brake. 2 in the ignition lock.
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- Applying automatically
ing away. The electric parking brake is applied auto-
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- matically:
tion P. Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
It may not be possible to release an applied standstill or
parking brake, if the on-board voltage is low Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
or there is a malfunction in the system. Con- stationary or
tact a qualified specialist workshop. Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi-
i The electric parking brake performs a cle at a standstill
function test at regular intervals while the In addition, at least one of the following con-
engine is switched off. The sounds that can ditions must be fulfilled:
be heard while this is occurring are normal. Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is
not fastened.
Rthere is a system malfunction.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.
i The electric parking brake is not automat-
Applying/releasing manually ically engaged if the engine is switched off
by the ECO start/stop function.
Applying
X Push handle :. Releasing automatically
When the electric parking brake is applied, Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada matically released if all of the following con-
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ditions are met:
ment cluster.
Rthe engine is running.
i The electric parking brake can also be Rthe transmission is in position D or R.
applied when the SmartKey is removed. Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Z
160 Driving tips
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
lid must be closed. six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following result of lack of use.
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
release the electric parking brake: seek advice.
Driving and parking
Rthe driver's door is closed.

i You can obtain information about trickle
Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi- chargers from a qualified specialist work-
tion P or you have previously driven faster shop.
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-
erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the Driving tips
parking brake will be released and the vehi- General notes
cle will start to move.
Emergency braking
G WARNING
The vehicle can also be braked during an If you switch off the ignition while driving,
emergency by using the electric parking safety-relevant functions are only available
brake. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
X While driving, push handle : of the electric for example, the power steering and the brake
parking brake (Y page 158). boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
i The vehicle is braked for as long as han- of an accident.
dle : of the electric parking brake is
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
pressed. The longer electric parking brake
handle : is depressed, the greater the
G WARNING
braking force.
If you operate mobile communication equip-
During braking: ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Ra warning tone sounds traffic conditions. You could also lose control
Rthe Release Park. Brake message of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
appears Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada is stationary.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
still, the electric parking brake is engaged. phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
Parking the vehicle for a long period hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by before operating the telephone.
exhaustive discharging. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Driving tips 161
Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
RThe tires should always be inflated to the reason, only have work on the engine carried
recommended tire pressure. out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Driving and parking

RRemove unnecessary loads. Benz technicians.
RRemove roof racks when they are not nee- The engine settings must not be changed
ded. under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. specific service work must be carried out at
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
RHave all maintenance work carried out as
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display. ECO display
Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in The ECO display provides feedback on how
hilly terrain. economical your driving characteristics are.
The ECO display assists you in achieving the
Drinking and driving most economical driving style for the selec-
ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your
G WARNING driving style can significantly influence the
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and vehicle's consumption.
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Example: ECO display
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- The ECO display consists of three bars:
ing drugs. RAcceleration
RConstant
Emission control RCoasting
G WARNING The percent value is the average value of the

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust three bars. The three bars and the mean value
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There age indicates a more economical driving
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave style.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- The ECO display does not indicate the actual
out sufficient ventilation. fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count
in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed
Certain engine systems are designed to keep consumption.
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
Z
162 Driving tips
Apart from driving style, consumption is change dynamically at the beginning of the
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: journey. On longer journeys, there are
RLoad fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
RTire pressure
RCold start For further information on the ECO display,
Driving and parking
see (Y page 200).

RChoice of route
RElectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO dis- Braking
play.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories: G WARNING
RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera- If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
tion processes): an attempt to increase the engine's braking
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
especially at higher speeds There is an increased danger of skidding and
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration accidents.
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
at all times): ing on a slippery road surface.
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration Downhill gradients
and deceleration
! On long and steep gradients, you must
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration a lower gear in good time. This allows you to
processes): take advantage of the engine's braking
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, effect. For this, you need to have selected
keeping your distance and early release manual drive program M. This helps you to
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast avoid overheating the brakes and wearing
without use of the brakes. them out excessively.
- The bar empties: frequent braking When you take advantage of the engine's
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
i An economical driving style specially
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-
requires driving at moderate engine
face. This could cause damage to the drive
speeds.
train. This type of damage is not covered by
To achieve a higher value in the categories the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Acceleration and Constant
Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendations. i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal
on downhill gradients while the manual
Rdrive in drive program E.
drive program M is temporarily activated:
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. the automatic transmission may switch to
on the highway, only the bar for Constant the last active automatic drive program E or
will change. S. The automatic transmission may shift to
a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's
i The ECO display summarizes the driving
braking effect.
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
Driving tips 163
Heavy and light loads RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do not
G WARNING endanger other road users when doing so.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
driving, the braking system can overheat. This beginning and end of a journey.
increases the stopping distance and can even
Driving and parking

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
ahead.
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Servicing the brakes
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time. ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn-
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly ing tone while the engine is running, the
results in excessive and premature wear to brake fluid level may be too low. Observe
the brake pads. additional warning messages in the multi-
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy function display.
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. The brake fluid level may be too low due to
Drive on for a short while. This allows the air- brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
flow to cool the brakes more quickly. Have the brake system checked immedi-
ately. This work should be carried out at a
Wet roads qualified specialist workshop.
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain ! A function or performance test should
without braking, there may be a delayed reac- only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first eter. If you are planning to have the vehicle
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has tested on such a dynamometer, contact an
been washed or driven through deep water. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
You have to depress the brake pedal more obtain further information first. Otherwise,
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the you could damage the drive train or the
vehicle in front. brake system.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- ! As the ESP® system operates automati-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- cally, the engine and the ignition must be
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-
the brake discs, thereby drying them more tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:
quickly and protecting them against corro-
Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a
sion.
brake dynamometer (for a maximum of
ten seconds)
Limited braking performance on salt-
Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle
treated roads
raised.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt Braking triggered automatically by ESP®
residue may form on the brake discs and may seriously damage the brake system.
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance. All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop to arrange this.
Z
164 Driving tips
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the function-
ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
Driving and parking
You can find a description of Brake Assist

(BAS) on (Y page 64).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your
vehicle which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
pads/linings which have not been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-
cle's operating safety. Front wheel
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
standard. Brake fluid which has not been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which is not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Checking brake lining thickness

You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
ness using a test gauge. Color-coding (green
or red) on the test gauge allows you to deter-
mine whether the brake pad/lining thickness
is still sufficient. The test gauge is in the vehi-
cle document wallet in the glove box.
Rear wheel
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gauge
A.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 157).
X Move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Place test gauge A between the wheel's
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
Driving tips 165
X Hold test gauge A vertically on brake Winter driving

disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto
brake disc :. G WARNING
X Check which color field ? the arrow on If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
measuring pin ; is pointing to. an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Driving and parking

Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
sufficient. There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ing on a slippery road surface.
To avoid an inaccurate measurement: G DANGER

Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
the brake disc such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
Driving on wet roads fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
Hydroplaning
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
If water has accumulated to a certain depth around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
on the road surface, there is a danger of ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
hydroplaning occurring, even if: window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Ryou drive at low speeds. facing into the wind.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
you must drive in the following manner: surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
Rlower your speed. and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
Ravoid ruts. control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Ravoid sudden steering movements. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
Rbrake carefully. stopped when moving at low speed:
X Shift the transmission to position N.
Driving on flooded roads X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
! Do not drive through flooded areas. corrective steering.

Check the depth of any water before driving The outside temperature indicator is not
through it. Drive slowly through standing designed to serve as an ice-warning device
water. Otherwise, water may enter the and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
vehicle interior or the engine compartment. Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
This can damage the electronic compo- played after a short delay.
nents in the engine or the automatic trans- Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
mission. Water can also be drawn in by the ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
engine's air suction nozzles and this can face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
cause engine damage. especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Z
166 Driving systems
You should pay special attention to road con- Do not use cruise control:
ditions when temperatures are around freez- Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
ing point. allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
For more information on driving with snow in heavy traffic or on winding roads
chains, see (Y page 317). Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
Driving and parking
For more information on driving with summer erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
tires, see (Y page 316). traction and the vehicle could then skid
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
section (Y page 316). heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Driving systems
Cruise control Cruise control lever
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in
good time. For this, you will need to have
selected manual drive program M
(Y page 152). By doing so, you will make use
of the braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the load on the brake system and : To activate or increase speed
prevents the brakes from overheating and ; To activate or reduce speed
wearing too quickly. = To deactivate cruise control
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- ? To activate at the current speed/last
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a stored speed
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
When you activate cruise control, the stored
store any road speed above 20 mph
speed is shown in the multifunction display
(30 km/h).
for five seconds.
Activation conditions
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
To activate cruise control, all of the following
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road, Rthe electric parking brake must be
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control released.
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, (30 km/h).
for braking in good time and for staying in RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
your lane. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the selector lever must be in position D.
Driving systems 167
Storing, maintaining and calling up a Setting a speed

speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Storing and maintaining the current until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
speed the speed set.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
Driving and parking

You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
speed. ments (1 km/h increments): briefly

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
press the cruise control lever up : or
or down ;. down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
pedal. stored is increased or reduced.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
automatically maintains the stored speed.
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain press the cruise control lever up : or
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The down ; to the pressure point.
stored speed is resumed when the gradient Every time the cruise control lever is
evens out. Cruise control maintains the pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored speed on downhill gradients by stored is increased or reduced.
automatically applying the brakes.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Storing the current speed or calling up the depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
last stored speed ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
G WARNING cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
ished overtaking.
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Deactivating cruise control
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- There are several ways to deactivate cruise
dent. control:
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you wards = .
do not know the stored speed, store the
or
desired speed again.
X Brake.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
you ?.
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
parking brake
pedal.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
The first time cruise control is activated, it
(30 km/h)
stores the current speed or regulates the
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed. Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving
Z
168 Driving systems
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a i This device complies with RSS-210 of
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
trol Off message in the multifunction dis- the following two conditions:
play for approximately five seconds. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
i When you switch off the engine, the last ference, and
Driving and parking
speed stored is cleared. 2. this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
DISTRONIC PLUS Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
General notes
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and in any non-approved way.
automatically helps you maintain the dis- Any unauthorized modification to this
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi- device could void the user's authority to
cles are detected with the aid of the radar operate the equipment.
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
automatically so that the set speed is not Important safety notes
exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long G WARNING
and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
cially important if the vehicle is laden. By Rpeople or animals
doing so, you will make use of the braking Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on ped or parked vehicles
the brake system and prevents the brakes
Roncoming and crossing traffic
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
of a collision, you will be warned visually and warnings nor intervene in such situations.
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- There is a risk of an accident.
vent a collision without your intervention. An Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
intermittent warning tone will then sound and uation and be ready to brake.
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in G WARNING
order to increase the distance to the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
in front or take evasive action provided it is tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
safe to do so. uations.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on brake the vehicle
roads with steep gradients. Rneither give a warning nor intervene
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it Raccelerate unexpectedly
can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
questions are asked about this. brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 169
G WARNING Rthere is interference by other radar sources
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. parking garages
If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
Driving and parking

a risk of an accident. edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and speed.
try to take evasive action. This speed may:
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
or an exit lane
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- hand lane
ing or other similar situations: Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
Rwhen towing the vehicle
lane
Rin the car wash
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS- driver of the speed stored.
TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control lever
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS-
TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are respon-
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,
for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and
for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose : To store the current speed or a higher
traction and the vehicle could then skid speed
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, ; To store the current speed or a lower
heavy rain or snow speed
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or ? To store the current speed or call up the
vehicles driving on a different line. last stored speed
In particular, the detection of obstacles can A To set the specified minimum distance
be impaired if:
ing the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Z
170 Driving systems
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed
Activation conditions
G WARNING
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the fol-
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
lowing activation conditions must be fulfilled:
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
Driving and parking
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
to two minutes after pulling away before stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
Rthe electric parking brake must be dent.
released. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
RActive Parking Assist must not be activa- do not know the stored speed, store the
ted. desired speed again.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you (Y page 169) towards you ?.
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be X Remove your foot from the accelerator
fastened. pedal.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
must be closed. time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
Activating
speed to the previously stored value.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or press it up : or down ;.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly Pulling away and driving
up : or down ; until the desired speed is i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
set. facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
X Remove your foot from the accelerator on a different line from another vehicle. The
pedal. vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired times.
stored speed.
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
i If you do not fully release the accelerator deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-
X If you want to pull away with DIS-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the
in front will then not be maintained. You will brake pedal.
be driving at the speed you determine by X Briefly pull the cruise control lever
the position of the accelerator pedal. (Y page 169) towards you ?.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when or
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is X Accelerate briefly.
18 mph (30 km/h). Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards speed to that of the vehicle in front.
you ? or press it up : or down ;. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. cle accelerates to the set speed.
Driving systems 171
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC Stopping

PLUS operates in the same way as cruise G WARNING
control.
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
Driving and parking

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
In this way, the distance you have selected is
maintained. the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
The vehicle is only accelerated up to the cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
speed you have stored. Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
Selecting the drive program been tampered with.
DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving Rthe battery is disconnected.
style when you have selected the S or M driv- Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
ing program (Y page 150). Acceleration
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed
is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have There is a risk of an accident.
selected the E driving program, the vehicle If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
accelerates more gently. This setting is rec- DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
ommended in stop-and-start traffic. against rolling away.
Changing lanes For further information on deactivating DIS-

If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC TRONIC PLUS (Y page 173).
PLUS supports you when: If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
Ryou are driving faster than 43.5 mph front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
(70 km/h) is stationary.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
tance to a vehicle in front stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger i After a time, the electric parking brake
of collision secures the vehicle and relieves the service
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is brake.
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted i Depending on the specified minimum dis-
if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front becomes too small. front. The specified minimum distance is
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS set using the control on the cruise control
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive lever.
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
drive vehicles.
Z
172 Driving systems
The electric parking brake automatically press the cruise control lever up : or
secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is down ; to the pressure point.
activated and: Every time the cruise control lever is
Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
door is open. stored is increased or reduced.
Driving and parking
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
matically switched off by the ECO start/ depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
stop function. erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
Ra system malfunction occurs. adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
Rthe power supply is not sufficient. speed stored after you have finished over-
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission taking.
may be shifted into position P automatically.
Setting the specified minimum distance
Setting a speed You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
between one and two seconds. With this func-
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
the speed set.
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 174).
i Make sure that you maintain the mini-
mum distance to the vehicle in front as
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary.
: To store the current speed or a higher

speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
Driving systems 173
X To increase: turn control = in direc- Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
tion ;. you in order to pull away and the front-
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater passenger door or one of the rear doors is
distance between your vehicle and the open
vehicle in front. Rthe vehicle is skidding
Driving and parking

X To decrease: turn control = in direc- Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
tion :. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐
distance between your vehicle and the TRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunc-
vehicle in front. tion display for approximately five seconds.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-

ment cluster
Displays in the speedometer
There are several ways to deactivate DIS-

TRONIC PLUS:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-
wards :. ometer
or When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
the multifunction display for approximately segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
five seconds. front = and stored speed : light up.
i The last speed stored remains stored until i For design reasons, the speed displayed
you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer may differ slightly from
is not deactivated if you depress the accel- the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
erator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
ted if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured with
the electric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Z
174 Driving systems
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- X Select the Assistance Graphic function
vated using the on-board computer
(Y page 204).
You will initially see the stored speed for
about five seconds when you activate DIS-
Driving and parking
TRONIC PLUS.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
: Vehicle in front, if detected brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
; Distance indicator, current distance to deactivated.
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- Cornering, going into and coming out of a
cle in front; adjustable bend
? Own vehicle
In the Assistance menu (Y page 204) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance display.
X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 204).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
Driving systems 175
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles Obstructions and stationary vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- PLUS will not brake for these.
cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short. Crossing vehicles
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that

are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi-
because of its narrow width. The distance to cle to pull away unintentionally.
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Z
176 Driving systems
HOLD function Activation conditions
Important safety notes You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
G WARNING Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
Driving and parking
matically switched off by the ECO start/

despite being braked by the HOLD function if: stop function
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
the voltage supply. is fastened
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by Rthe electric parking brake is released
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake Rthe transmission position D, R or N is
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
engaged while driving a vehicle with an
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- automatic transmission
partment, the battery or the fuses have RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
Activating the HOLD function
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
Example: vehicles with a color multifunction dis-
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC play
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
ing or other similar situations: X Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.
Rwhen towing the vehicle X Depress the brake pedal.
Rin the car wash X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
Deactivating the HOLD function until : appears in the multifunction dis-
(Y page 177). play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
General notes release the brake pedal.
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the i If depressing the brake pedal the first
following situations: time does not activate the HOLD function,
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep wait briefly and then try again.
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Driving systems 177
Deactivating the HOLD function Conditions for activation

The HOLD function is deactivated automati- You can activate RACE START if:
cally if: Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid are
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic closed.
transmission: only when the transmission
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is running and the transmission,
is in position D or R. all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at
Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles operating temperature.
with automatic transmission. RSPORT handling mode is activated.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a (Y page 69)
certain amount of pressure until : disap- Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
pears from the multifunction display. position.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
parking brake. pedal is depressed (left foot).
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Rthe transmission is in position D.
i After a time, the electric parking brake Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 150).
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake. Activating RACE START
The electric parking brake automatically X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is and keep it depressed.
activated and: X Pull and hold both steering wheel shift pad-
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's dles.
seat belt is unfastened. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears
matically switched off by the ECO start/ in the multifunction display.
stop function. X Release both steering wheel shift paddles.
Ra system malfunction occurs. i If the activation conditions are no longer
Rthe power supply is not sufficient. fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission RACE START Not Possible See Opera‐
may be shifted into position P automatically. tor's Manual message appears in the
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-
RACE START dle shifter (Y page 151).
Important safety notes or
XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
RACE START enables optimal acceleration paddle shifter (Y page 151).
from a standing start. The precondition for The RACE START Available Depress
this is a suitable high-grip road surface.
gas pedal message appears in the multi-
RACE START is intended solely for activation function display.
on dedicated race circuits.
i If you do not depress the accelerator
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi- pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is
cles. canceled. The multifunction display shows
the RACE START Canceled message.
Z
178 Driving systems
XFully depress the accelerator pedal. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
The engine speed is increased. time and for staying in your lane.
The RACE START Release brake to If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
start message appears in the multifunc- ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
tion display. necessary when pulling away.
Driving and parking
i If you do not release the brake pedal RAccelerate less when driving.
within a short time, RACE START will be
canceled. The multifunction display shows ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
the RACE START Canceled message. raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
accelerator pedal depressed.
wheels must remain either on the ground or
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-
be fully raised. Observe the instructions for
eration.
towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
The RACE START Active message appears contact with the ground.
in the multifunction display.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S is acti- chains if necessary.
vated. SPORT handling mode remains activa-
ted.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if PARKTRONIC
you release the accelerator pedal during
RACE START or if any of the activation condi- Important safety notes
tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
Not Possible or RACE START Canceled ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
message appears in the multifunction dis- around your vehicle using six sensors in the
play. front bumper and six sensors in the rear
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
short period of time, it is only available audibly the distance between your vehicle
again after the vehicle has been driven a and an object.
certain distance. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate
surroundings. You are always responsible for
4MATIC safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
manently driven. Together with ESP®, it
there are no persons, animals or objects in
improves the traction of your vehicle when-
the area in which you are maneuvering.
ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
grip. ! When parking, pay particular attention to
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC objects above or below the sensors, such
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot TRONIC does not detect such objects when
take account of road, weather and traffic con- they are in the immediate vicinity of the
ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in the objects.
Driving systems 179
The sensors may not detect snow and other

objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
Driving and parking

PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
Side view
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshiftthe transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the electric parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Range of the sensors Top view

General notes The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
sideration that are:
care not to scratch or damage them
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- (Y page 291).
mals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
Front sensors
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
80 cm)
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
Minimum distance
side (example)
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
20 cm)
Z
180 Driving systems
If there is an obstacle within this range, the Transmission Warning display

relevant warning displays light up and a warn- position
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be D Front area activated
shown.
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
Driving and parking
is rolling back- activated

Warning displays
wards
The warning displays show the distance
P No areas activated
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents. One or more segments light up as the vehicle
The warning display for the rear area is loca- approaches an obstacle, depending on the
ted on the headliner in the rear compartment. vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approx-
imately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec-
onds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Warning display for the front area
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
light up. : Indicator lamp
The selected transmission position and the ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
mine which warning display is active when the
deactivated.
engine is running.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Driving systems 181
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 291).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on result in a collision with another road user.
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol There is a risk of an accident.
indicates a suitable parking space. Active Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
steering intervention can assist you during vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
maneuvering and parking. You may also use ing Assist parking procedure.
PARKTRONIC (Y page 178).
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
Important safety notes obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
the wheels or tires.
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking spaces which are not suitable for
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that parking, for example:
no persons, animals or objects are in the Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
maneuvering range. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Z
182 Driving systems
Parking tips: G WARNING

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- If there are objects above the detection range,
ing space as possible. Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
RParking spaces that are littered or over- You may cause a collision as a result. There is
grown might be identified or measured a risk of an accident.
Driving and parking
incorrectly. If there are objects above the detection range,

RParking spaces that are partially occupied stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly. For further information on the detection
range (Y page 179).
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Active Parking Assist does not support you
with parking spaces at right-angles to the
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
direction of travel if:
(Y page 180) warning messages during the
parking procedure. Rtwo parking spaces are located directly
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure next to one another
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
Assist will then be canceled. obstacle such as a low curb
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes Ryou park forwards
from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist does not support you
Active Parking Assist. with parking spaces that are parallel or at
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow right-angles to the direction of travel if:
chains are installed. Rthe parking space is on a curb
RMake sure that the tire pressures are Rthe parking space is apparently blocked,
always correct. This has a direct influence for example by foliage or grass paving
on the parking characteristics of the vehi- blocks
cle. Rthe range of movement is too small
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the cle which is not clearly defined such as a
direction of travel tree or a trailer
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected : Detected parking space on the left
when the parking space is measured. These ; Parking symbol
are not taken into account when the parking
= Detected parking space on the right
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods Active Parking Assist is automatically activa-
vehicles. ted when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
Driving systems 183
system independently locates and measures Always apply the brakes yourself when
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. maneuvering and parking.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces: X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the
Driving and parking

the instrument cluster.
direction of travel
X Shift the transmission to position R.
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
% message appears in the multifunction
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
display.
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
vehicle
button on the multifunction steering wheel
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of
or pull away.
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider
or
than your vehicle
X To park using Active Parking Assist:
i In the case of parking spaces that are at press the a button on the multifunction
right angles to the direction of travel, steering wheel.
please ensure that the parking space is The Park Assist Active Accelerate
long enough to accommodate your vehicle. and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
When driving at speeds below 19 mph sage appears in the multifunction display.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
status indicator in the instrument cluster.
XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
When a parking space has been detected, an
all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed
arrow towards the right or the left also
of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h) when
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist
backing up. Otherwise Active Parking
only displays parking spaces on the front-
Assist will be canceled.
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-
er's side are displayed as soon as the turn i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
signal on the driver's side is activated. When the best parking results by backing up as
parking on the driver's side, this must remain far as possible. When doing so, also
switched on until you acknowledge the use of observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
button on the multifunction steering wheel. continuous warning tone, if not before.
The system automatically determines Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
whether the parking space is parallel or at ing spaces.
right-angles to the direction of travel. The Park Assist Active Select D
A parking space is displayed while you are Observe Surroundings message appears in
driving past it, and until you are approx- the multifunction display.
imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. X Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Parking Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
G WARNING the other direction.
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by inter-
vening actively in the steering. If you do not
brake there is a risk of an accident.
Z
184 Driving systems
The Park Assist Active Accelerate cedure will be canceled. A sensible parking
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- position can no longer be achieved from
sage appears in the multifunction display. this position.
i You will achieve the best results by wait-
ing for the steering procedure to complete Exiting a parking space
Driving and parking
before pulling away. In order that Active Parking Assist can sup-
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all port you when you exit the parking space:
times. Rthe border of the parking space must be
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the high enough. A curb is too small, for exam-
continuous warning tone, if not before. ple.
The Park Assist Active Select R Rthe border of the parking space must not be
Observe Surroundings message appears in too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
the multifunction display. not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
Further transmission shifts may be neces- position as it is maneuvering into the park-
sary. ing space.
As soon as the parking procedure is com- Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
plete, the Park Assist Finished message (1.0 m) must be available.
appears and a warning tone sounds. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
Active Parking Assist is then deactivated. exiting a parking space if you have parked the
PARKTRONIC is still available. vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you Active Parking Assist.
with steering interventions. When Active X Start the engine.
Parking Assist is finished, you must steer X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. you are pulling away.
X Maneuver if necessary. X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Always observe the warning messages dis- The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 180). % message appears in the multifunction
display.
Parking tips:
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the button on the multifunction steering wheel
parking space after parking is dependent or pull away.
on various factors. These include the posi-
or
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
X To exit a parking space using Active
front and behind it and the conditions of the
location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist: press the a button on
Parking Assist guides you too far into a the multifunction steering wheel.
parking space, or not far enough into it. In The Park Assist Active Accelerate
some cases, it may also lead you across or and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
onto the curb. If necessary, you should can- sage appears in the multifunction display.
cel the parking procedure with Active Park- X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
ing Assist. X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
RYou can also engage forward gear prema- ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a
turely. The vehicle redirects and does not maximum speed of approximately 6 mph
drive as far into the parking space. Should a (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space.
gear be changed too early, the parking pro-
Driving systems 185
Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can- Canceling Active Parking Assist
celed.
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the con-
time.
tinuous warning tone, if not before.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Driving and parking

required while the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
once. The Park Assist Canceled mes-
the other direction. The Park Assist
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears or
in the multifunction display. X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-
i You will achieve the best results by wait- ter console (Y page 180).
ing for the steering procedure to complete PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
before pulling away. Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
If you back up after activation, the steering appears in the multifunction display.
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion. Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-
cally if:
X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
times if necessary. Rtransmission position P is selected
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
continuous warning tone, if not before. longer possible
Once you have exited the parking space com- Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-
the Park Assist Finished message ment cluster.
appears in the multifunction display. You will A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
then have to steer and merge into traffic on disappears and the multifunction display
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You shows the Park Assist Canceled mes-
can take over the steering, before the vehicle sage.
has exited the parking space completely. This
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
is useful, for example when you recognize
steer again yourself.
that it is already possible to pull out of the
parking space.
Z
186 Driving systems
Rear view camera are no persons, animals or objects in the area

in which you are maneuvering.
General notes Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Driving and parking
Rif the trunk lid is open

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle. winter
The rear view camera is an optical parking and Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/ event, have the camera position and setting
COMAND display. checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a The field of vision and other functions of the
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. rear view camera may be restricted due to
The rear view camera is protected from rain- additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
Only once the maneuvering process has been Activating/deactivating the rear view
completed and the rear view camera has camera
switched off does the flap close again. For
technical reasons, the flap may remain open X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
briefly after the rear view camera has been is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
deactivated. If you switch off the engine, the X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
flap will also close. function is selected in the Audio system/
COMAND Online; see the separate operat-
i The text of messages shown in the
ing instructions.
COMAND display depends on the language
X Engage reverse gear.
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND Guide lines are used to show the area
display. behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND
display.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 291).
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
Important safety notes vates if you shift the transmission to P on
vehicles with automatic transmission or after
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a driving forwards a short distance.
replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
Driving systems 187
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display

The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Driving and parking

Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin close range above the handle on the
trunk lid
! Objects not at ground level may appear to Guide lines
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: ? Bumper
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle A Red guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe drawbar of a trailer imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe rear section of an HGV
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
Ra slanted post
vehicle
Use the guidelines only for orientation. C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Approach objects no further than the bot- D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
tom-most guideline. imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The lanes and guide lines are only displayed if
you have engaged reverse gear.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Lanes
: White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
; Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
ing wheel angle, vehicle width to the outer
side of the wheels (dynamic) Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC
and COMAND
= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
: Front warning display
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
operational readiness indicator
? Bumper
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND:
if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 178),
Z
188 Driving systems
an additional operational readiness indicator Reverse perpendicular parking with the

will appear in COMAND display ;.If the steering wheel at an angle
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or X Drive past the parking space and bring the
light up, warning displays : and = are also vehicle to a standstill.
active or light up correspondingly in the
Driving and parking
COMAND display.
"Reverse parking" function

X Make sure that the rear view camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking" func-
tion is selected; see the separate operating
instructions for the audio system/
COMAND.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Backing up straight into a parking space Turning the steering wheel

without turning the steering wheel : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its cur-
rent position
; Parking space marking
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-
ing space until the red lane reaches parking
space marking ;.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
: White lane with steering wheel straight

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
= Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
X With the help of white lane :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space. Backing up with the steering wheel turned
X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
back up until you reach the end position. will take with the steering wheel in its cur-
Red guide line = is then at the end of the rent position
parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
lel in the parking space.
Driving systems 189
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in ATTENTION ASSIST

front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel General notes
with the parking space marking as possi- ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
ble. monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
Driving and parking

It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-
tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-
centration on the part of the driver, it sug-
gests you take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
Driving to the final position or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
: White lane at current steering wheel angle recognize them at all. The system is not a
; Parking space marking substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi- ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
tion while the vehicle is stationary. fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
: Red guide line at a distance of approx- Rif there is a strong side wind
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
vehicle
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
; White lane with steering wheel straight
acceleration
= End of parking space
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
X Back up carefully until you have reached than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
the final position. 112 mph (180 km/h)
Red guide line : is then at end of parking Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak-
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in ing a telephone call with it
the parking space. Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Z
190 Driving systems
Warning and display messages in the Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs
multifunction display with a camera attached behind the top of the
windshield.
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 206).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
Driving and parking
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after

your journey has begun. You then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice and the
Attention Assist: Take a Break!
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Press the a or % button to confirm
the message. : Speed Limit Assist camera
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you Important safety notes
do not take a break, you will be warned again Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon- always detect traffic signs with information
dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still about the maximum permissible speed. Traf-
detects typical indicators of fatigue or fic signs always have priority over the Speed
increasing lapses in concentration. Limit Assist display.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con- The system may be impaired or may not func-
tinue your journey and starts assessing your tion if:
tiredness again if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
Ryou switch off the engine. rain, fog or spray
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or oncoming traffic
to take a break. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
é symbol appears in the multifunction of the camera
display in the assistance graphic display. Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by
dirt, snow or trees
Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated
Speed Limit Assist
Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for
General notes instance near roadworks or on multi-lane
Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed roads
limits in the multifunction display. Data from
the navigation system is also used for this
purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed
limit or the end of a speed limit is detected, it
is shown in the multifunction display. If Speed
Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs,
the speed limit from the digital road map is
used and shown in the display.
Driving systems 191
Information in the multifunction display Rthe road type changes (e.g. highway, coun-
try road).
Briefly showing detected traffic signs in
Ryou have traveled a certain minimum dis-
the multifunction display
tance without the traffic sign being repea-
X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning ted or detected again.
function using the on-board computer
Driving and parking

(Y page 205).
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the Lane Tracking package
end of a speed limit appears in the multi-
function display for around five seconds as General notes
soon as it is detected. Any other informa-
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
tion in the multifunction display is hidden
Spot Assist (Y page 191) and Lane Keeping
for this period.
Assist (Y page 193).
Blind Spot Assist

General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the moni-
tored area. If you then switch on the corre-
: Maximum permissible speed (example) sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will
; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles also receive a visual and audible collision
subject to the restriction in the additional warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist
sign (example) uses sensors in the rear bumper.
= Additional character in fog
? Speed Limit Assist is available and
switched on G WARNING
Permanently showing detected traffic Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
signs in the multifunction display Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
X Display the assistance graphic using the
on-board computer (Y page 204). Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the differential and overtake your vehicle
end of a speed limit appears in the multi- As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
function display as soon as it is detected. warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
Traffic sign : indicating a speed limit is gen- an accident.
erally displayed until: Always observe the traffic conditions care-
Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
limit is detected. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
Ryou make a turn. detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
Ryou leave or enter a city. attentive driving.
i USA only:
Z
192 Driving systems
This device has been approved by the FCC this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensors in the rear bumper.
sensor is intended for use in an automotive If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
radar system only. Removing, tampering lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
with, or altering the device will void any be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Driving and parking
warranties, and is not permitted by the driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner
any non-approved way. side of their lane.
Any unauthorized modification to this Due to the nature of the system:
device could void the user’s authority to
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
operate the equipment.
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
Monitoring range of the sensors lane borders.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
be impaired if: alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
Rdirt
trucks, for a prolonged time.
on the sensors or anything else cover-
ing the sensors The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice
rain or snow
or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. For
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
example, the radar sensors must not be cov-
motorbike or bicycle ered by bicycle racks or overhanging loads.
Rthe road has very wide lanes Following a severe impact or in the event of
Rthe road has narrow lanes damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may oth-
erwise not work properly.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated. Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
(3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For
Driving systems 193
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica- Lane Keeping Assist
tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
operational. General notes
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
Driving and parking

20 mph (30 km/h), then warning lamp : on
the corresponding side lights up red. This
warning is always emitted when a vehicle
enters the blind spot monitoring range from
behind or from the side. When you overtake a
vehicle, the warning only occurs if the differ-
ence in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
The brightness of the indicator/warning front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
lamps is adjusted automatically according to mounted at the top of the windshield. Active
the ambient light. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the road and can warn you before you leave
Collision warning your lane unintentionally.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range This function is available in the range between
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
corresponding turn signal, a double warning 200 km/h).
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If A warning may be given if a front wheel
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
are indicated by the flashing of red warning means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
lamp :. There are no further warning tones. ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-
G WARNING
ted in the on-board computer
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
(Y page 206).
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors Rgive an unnecessary warning
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds Rnot give a warning
and then turn yellow. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
Z
194 Driving systems
You should always steer, brake or accelerate the lane markings in the assistance graph-
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- ics display (Y page 204) are shown in
ing Assist. green.
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane tion occurs if:
Driving and parking
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of

an accident nor override the laws of physics. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the warnings are suppressed for a certain
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane period of time.
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in ABS, BAS or ESP®.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
time and for staying in your lane. tion occurs if:
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
vehicle in the lane.
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
The system may be impaired or may not func- period of time.
tion if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- ABS, BAS or ESP®.
cient illumination of the road, or due to Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
snow, rain, fog or spray
Ryou brake hard.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
surface is wet)
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the In order that you are warned only when nec-
vicinity of the camera essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
marking, the system recognizes certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
struction work The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow bend.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free-
small and the lane markings thus cannot be way.
detected Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. The warning vibration occurs later if:
lanes branch off, cross one another or Rthe road has narrow lanes.
merge
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

XSwitch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 206).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
195
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 196
Menus and submenus ...................... 199
Display messages ............................. 213
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 243
196 Displays and operation
Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Operator's manual describes all For an overview, see the instrument panel
models and all standard and optional equip- illustration (Y page 31).
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
Country-specific differences are possible. Displays and operation
Please note that your vehicle may not be
Instrument cluster lighting
also applies to safety-related systems and The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
functions. displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
trol knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
Important safety notes (Y page 31).
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
G WARNING or counter-clockwise.
If you operate information systems and com- If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- L, the brightness is dependent upon
cle while driving, you will be distracted from the brightness of the ambient light.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. automatically controls the brightness of
Only operate the equipment when the traffic the multifunction display.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this In daylight, the displays in the instrument
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention cluster are not illuminated.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Coolant temperature display
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- G WARNING
functioned, you may not recognize function Opening the hood when the engine is over-
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The heated or when there is a fire in the engine
operating safety of your vehicle may be compartment could expose you to hot gases
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. or other service products. There is a risk of
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked injury.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Let an overheated engine cool down before
ately. opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
You must observe the legal requirements for and contact the fire department.
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer. ! A display message is shown if the coolant
The on-board computer only shows messages temperature is too high.
or warnings from certain systems in the mul- If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
tifunction display. You should therefore make (120 †), do not continue driving. The
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all engine will otherwise be damaged.
Displays and operation 197
The coolant temperature gauge is in the Operating the on-board computer

instrument cluster on the right-hand side.
Under normal operating conditions and with Overview
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road con-
: Multifunction display
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point. ; Switches on the Voice Control System;
see the separate operating instructions
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display. = Right control panel
? Left control panel
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay. A Back button
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Speedometer with segments lock.
The speedometer is divided into segments on You can control the multifunction display and
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. the settings in the on-board computer using
The segments in the speedometer indicate the buttons on the multifunction steering
which speed range is available. wheel.
RCruise control activated (Y page 166):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 168):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
Z
198 Displays and operation
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate oper-
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: ating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages
selects a name or telephone RExits the telephone book/redial
number
memory
9 Press and hold:
% Press and hold:
: RIn the Audio menu: selects the RCalls up the standard display in
previous/next station or selects
the Trip menu
an audio track or a video scene
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
Multifunction display
starts rapid scrolling through the
phone book
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits phone book/redial mem-
: Permanent display: outside temperature
ory
or speed (Y page 208)
6 RMakes or accepts a call ; Time
RSwitches to the redial memory = Text field
? Menu bar
A Drive program (Y page 147)
B Transmission position (Y page 147)
Menus and submenus 199
X To show menu bar ?: press the = Trip menu

or ; button on the steering wheel.
Standard display
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using the audio sys-
tem or COMAND, see the separate operat-
ing instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display: X Press and hold the % button on the
Z Shift recommendation steering wheel until the Trip menu with
(Y page 152) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 181)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 166)
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Reset"
(Y page 112)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 143)
ë HOLD function (Y page 176)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview Example: trip computer "From Start"
: Distance
Operating the on-board computer ; Time
(Y page 197).
= Average speed
Depending on the equipment installed in the
? Average fuel consumption
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RTrip menu (Y page 199)
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
X Press the 9 or : button to select
(Y page 201)
From Start or From Reset.
Reset
RAudio menu (Y page 202)
The values in the From Start submenu are
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 203)
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
the values in the From Reset submenu are
(Y page 204) calculated from the last time the submenu
RServ. menu (Y page 207) was reset (Y page 200).
RSett menu (Y page 207) The From Start trip computer is automati-
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 210) cally reset when:
The Audio
Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi- than four hours.
cles with COMAND. The examples given in R999 hours have been exceeded.
this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
equipped with COMAND.
Z
200 Menus and submenus
The From Reset trip computer is automati- Digital speedometer

cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or

99,999 miles.
ECO display
: Shift recommendation (Y page 152)

; Digital speedometer
Gearshift recommendation : is not given on
AMG vehicles.
Example: ECO display
The ECO display is not available for AMG vehi- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
cles.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
Resetting values
ECO DISPLAY.
DISPLAY
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 161).
Displaying the range and current fuel Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
consumption
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset.
approximate range and the current fuel X Press the a button.
consumption (not for AMG vehicles). X Press the : button to select Yes and
The approximate range that can be covered press the a button to confirm.
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount of i If you reset the values in the ECO display,
fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a the values in the "From start" trip computer
vehicle being refueled C instead of the are also reset. If you reset the values in the
range.
"From start" trip computer, the values in Change of direction announced without a

the ECO display are also reset. lane recommendation
Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND;
see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- : Road into which the change of direction
ing wheel to select the Navi menu. leads
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display ; Distance to change of direction and visual
shows navigation instructions. For more distance display
information, see the separate operating = Symbol for change of direction
instructions. When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
Route guidance not active and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Direction of travel
; Current road
Route guidance active

No change of direction announced
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
? Lane not recommended (dark gray)
: Distance to the destination A Possible lane
; Distance to the next change of direction B Symbol for change of direction
= Current road On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
? "Follow the road's course" symbol tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes
may be added.
Z
Recommended lane =: in this lane you will X To select a station from the station list:
be able to complete the next change of direc- press and briefly hold the 9 or :
tion and the one after that. button.
Lane not recommended ?: you will not be If no station list is received:
able to complete the next change of direction X To select a station using the station
if you stay in this lane. search: press and briefly hold the 9
Possible lane A: you will be able to complete or : button.
the next change of direction in this lane only.
i For information on changing waveband
Other status indicators of the naviga- and storing stations, see the separate oper-
tion system ating instructions.
RO: you have reached the destination or an i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
intermediate destination. normal radio.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route: Route For more information on satellite radio
calculating a new route operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
ROff map or Off road:
road the vehicle position
is outside the area of the digital map (off-
Operating an audio player or audio
map position).
media
RNo route:
route no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
CD changer display (example)

: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
: Waveband
and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3
; Station frequency with memory position
mode; see the separate operating instruc-
The memory position is only displayed along tions.
with station ; if this has been stored. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
and select Radio; see the separate operat- X To select the next/previous track:
ing instructions. briefly press the 9 or : button.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To select a track from the track list
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
X To select a stored station: briefly press or : button until desired track : has
the 9 or : button. been reached.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this When telephoning, you must observe the

function. legal requirements for the country in which
If track information is stored on the audio you are currently driving.
device or medium, the multifunction display X Switch on your mobile phone and audio
will show the number and title of the track. system or COMAND, see the separate
The current track does not appear in audio operating instructions.
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the
audio source connected). audio system or COMAND; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions.
Video DVD operation X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RTelephone No Service:
Service there is no net-
DVD changer display (example)
work available or the mobile phone is
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND searching for a network.
and select video DVD; see the separate
operating instructions.
Accepting a call
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
been reached. Example: incoming call
X Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
Telephone menu
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
Introduction menu, a display message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
G WARNING
You can accept a call even if you are not in the
If you operate information systems and com-
Tel menu.
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
Rejecting or ending a call
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Press the ~ button on the steering
Only operate the equipment when the traffic wheel.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this You can end or reject a call even if you are not
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention in the Tel menu.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Z
Dialing an entry from the phone book Assistance menu

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Introduction

X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one
second.
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol-
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the lowing options:
button or reach the end of the list.
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
X If only one telephone number is stored
(Y page 204)
for a name: press the 6 or a button
RActivating/deactivating the Speed Limit
to start dialing.
Assist message function (Y page 205)
or
RActivating/deactivating ESP®
X If there is more than one number for a
(Y page 205)
particular name: press the 6 or a
RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-
button to display the numbers.
ing function (Y page 205)
RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-
number you want to dial.
VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 206)
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ing.
ASSIST (Y page 206)
or
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X If you do not want to make a call: press
(Y page 206)
the ~ or % button.
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 206)
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names Assistance graphic
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X If you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- G WARNING

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
Graphic.
Graphic of skidding and an accident.
X Press the a button.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
The multifunction display shows the DIS- bed in the following.
TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis-
tance graphic. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
The assistance graphic displays the status of lowing situations:
and information from the following driving Rwhen using snow chains
systems or driving safety systems: Rin deep snow
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 174) Ron sand or gravel
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 189) Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 193) cles (Y page 69).
RSpeed Limit Assist (Y page 190) For further information about ESP®, see
RDistance warning function of COLLISION (Y page 67).
PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 64) X Start the engine.
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(Y page 67) ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Speed Limit Assist ESP.
ESP
Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit X Press the a button.
Assist message function The current selection is displayed.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To activate/deactivate: press the a
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. button again.
X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP® is deactivated if the å warning
Speed Limit Assist.
Assist lamp in the instrument cluster lights up
continuously when the engine is running.
The current selection is displayed. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-
X To activate or deactivate: press a. ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
When the Speed Limit Assist message available due to a malfunction.
function is activated, the assistance Observe the information on warning lamps
graphic shows the Ä symbol. (Y page 247).
If the Speed Limit Assist message function Observe the information on display messages
is activated, a detected speed limit is auto- (Y page 214).
matically displayed for five seconds. Other
items in the multifunction display are sup- Activating/deactivating the distance
pressed during this time. warning function
Deactivating/activating ESP® ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Observe the "Important safety notes" section X Press 9 or : to select Distance
in the description of ESP (Y page 68). Warning.
Warning
Z
X Press the a button. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

The current selection is displayed. Assist

X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again. ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
When the distance warning function is acti- X Press the 9 or : button to select
vated, the Ä symbol appears in the mul-
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist
tifunction display in the assistance graphic
display.
The current selection is displayed.
Further information on the distance warning
function (Y page 64).
button again.
Activating/deactivating COLLISION For further information about Blind Spot
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Assist, see (Y page 191).
When the Blind Spot Assist Sensors
Deactivated message is shown, the radar
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
sensors are deactivated.
X Switch on the radar sensor system
Collision Prevent. Assist.
Assist
(Y page 209).
The current selection is displayed.
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
button again.
When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
PLUS is activated, the Ä symbol ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
appears in the multifunction display in the X Press the 9 or : button to select
assistance graphic display. Lane Keeping Assist.
Assist
For further information about COLLISION X Press the a button.
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67). The current selection is displayed.
X Press a to confirm.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off,
ASSIST Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
X Press the 9 or : button to select multifunction display shows the lane mark-
ATTENTION ASSIST.
ASSIST ings as bright lines in the assistance
graphic.
The current selection is displayed. For further information about Lane Keeping
X To activate/deactivate: press the a Assist, see (Y page 193).
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the
À symbol appears in the assistance
graphic in the multifunction display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 189).
Maintenance menu Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
tance
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers.
In the Serv menu, you have the following ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
options: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RCalling up display messages in message

Instrument Cluster submenu.
memory (Y page 213) X Press a to confirm.
RChecking the tire pressure electronically X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 321) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-

RCalling up the service due date
tion.
(Y page 286) You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
miles
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Settings menu The selected unit of measurement for dis-
tance applies to:
Introduction
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Rthe current consumption and the range
Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu
Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
In the Sett menu, you have the following
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings Switching the additional speedometer
RChanging the light settings on/off
RChanging the vehicle settings The Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
RChanging the convenience settings
[mph] function allows you to choose whether
the multifunction display in the status area
RRestoring the factory settings
always shows the speed in km/h or in mph
instead of the outside temperature.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Setting the brightness of the ambient
Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer lighting

[mph] function. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
You will see the selected setting: on or off
off. ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the
Amb. Light +/- function.
outside temperature.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Change the setting with a.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to a level from Off to Level 5
Instrument Cluster submenu. (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the setting.
Permanent Display function.
You will see the selected setting Outside Activating/deactivating surround light-
Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]/
[km/h] ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-
Speedometer [mph].
[mph] off
X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have activated the Surround Light‐
ing function and the light switch is set to
Lights Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Switching the daytime running lamps on/ Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
off remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
Canada only: daytime running lamps are with the key. If you start the engine, the
required by law. You cannot set the Daytime surround lighting is switched off and auto-
Running Lights function via the on-board matic headlamp mode is activated
computer. (Y page 109).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
X Press the : or 9 button to select the after the engine is switched off. If you close
Light submenu. all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
Daytime Running Lights function. ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
If the Daytime Running Lights function X Press the : or 9 button to select the
has been switched on, the cone of light and Light submenu.
the W symbol in the multifunction dis- X Press a to confirm.
play are shown in orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Surround Lighting function.
Further information on daytime running When the Surround Lighting function is
lamps (Y page 109). activated, the light cone and the area
around the vehicle are displayed in orange Vehicle

in the multifunction display.
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
rior lighting temporarily: ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Key to position 0 in the ignition lock. Vehicle submenu.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Press a to confirm.
tion lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is Automatic Door Lock function.
deactivated. When the Automatic Door Lock function
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
reactivated the next time you start the in orange in the multifunction display.
engine. X Press the a button to save the setting.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
when the surround lighting and delayed function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
lowing light up: For further information on the automatic lock-
RParking lamps ing feature, see (Y page 83).
RFront fog lamps
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
RLow-beam headlamps locking verification signal
RDaytime running lamps If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
RSide marker lamps an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Vehicle submenu.
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20 seconds after you remove the key
from the ignition lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Acoustic Lock function.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction dis-
play lights up orange.
Light submenu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
Interior Lighting Delay function. system
If the Interior Lighting Delay function X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
has been switched on, the vehicle interior is ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
displayed in orange in the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display. Vehicle submenu.
Z
X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press a to confirm.

Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.

Manual): The Reset All Settings? message
You will see the selected setting: Enabled appears.
or Disabled
Disabled. X Press the : or 9 button to select No
X Press the a button to save the setting. or Yes
Yes.
If the radar sensor system is switched off, X Press a to confirm the selection.
Blind Spot Assist is deactivated (Y page 191). If you have selected Yes
Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
Convenience For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lamps function in the Light submenu is only
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- reset if the vehicle is stationary.
ing feature on/off
This function is only available on vehicles with
the memory function (Y page 105). AMG menu in AMG vehicles
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
AMG displays
ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded
in when the vehicle is locked.
If you unlock the vehicle and then open a
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 103), they will not fold out automat-
ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be : Digital speedometer
folded out using the button on the door. ; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. ? Engine oil temperature
X Press the : or 9 button to select the A Coolant temperature
Convenience submenu. B Transmission fluid temperature
X Press a to confirm. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
X Press the : or 9 button to select the to select the AMG menu.
Auto. Mirror Folding function. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is engine has reached the overrevving range
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is when in the manual gearshift program.
displayed in orange in the multifunction Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes-
display. sages until you have shifted up.
X Press the a button to save the setting. If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡
(80 †), oil temperature ? is shown in blue.
Restoring the factory settings Avoid driving at full engine output during this
time.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If the transmission fluid temperature is below
122 ‡ (50 †), oil temperature B is shown in
blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during
Factory Setting submenu. this time.
SETUP Displaying the intermediate time

: Drive program (C
C/S
S/MM) X Press the = or ; button to select
; ESP® mode (ON
ON/OFF
OFF) or SPORT handling Interm. Time.
Time
mode (SPORT
SPORT) X Press a to confirm.
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® The intermediate time is displayed for five
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the seconds.
SPORT handling mode. Starting a new lap
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER : RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
Lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of six-
teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-
pleted with Finish Lap.
Lap
: Lap
; RACETIMER Stopping the RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the % button on the steering
ing wheel to select the AMG menu. wheel.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Confirm Yes with a.
RACETIMER is shown.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
X To start: press the a button to start the
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
RACETIMER. position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the
Z
key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to This function is shown if you have stored at
confirm Start
Start, timing is continued. least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
Resetting the current lap X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Press the = or ; button to select
overall evaluation is shown.
Reset Lap.
Lap
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Lap statistics
Deleting all laps
: Lap
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is ; Lap time
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are = Average lap speed
deleted. ? Lap length
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If A Top speed during lap
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap This function is only available if you have
does not have to be reset. stored at least two laps and have stopped the
X Reset the current lap. RACETIMER.
X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi- to select the AMG menu.
function display.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Press the : button to select Yes and
lap evaluation is shown.
press the a button to confirm. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
All laps are deleted. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
Overall statistics X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
Display messages 213
Display messages

General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 176) and parking (Y page 157).
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
214 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start assist
Currently Unavail‐ are temporarily unavailable.
able See Opera‐
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTION
tor's Manual
ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up
in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING

increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
Z

÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable
due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the

HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a mal-
÷ function.
Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTION
Operator's Manual ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
increase.

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 158).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 158).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Shift the transmission to P.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
Z

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 337).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
erative voltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA

only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
only) tion was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release
the Parking Brake
Z

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-

tioning.
Inoperative
X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified

Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-
tion Assist Plus tional. Possible causes are:
Currently Unavail‐ Rthe front bumper is dirty.
able See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tor's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the front bumper (Y page 291).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 69).
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is malfunctioning. The dis-

tion Assist Plus tance warning signal may also have failed.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

PRE-SAFE Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes

Functions Cur‐ are:
rently Limited See Rthe front bumper is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
sage disappears.
Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.
X Clean the front bumper (Y page 291).
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 69).
PRE-SAFE Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal may
Functions Limited also have failed.
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
SRS Malfunction ter.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40).


6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Right Malfunction gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
Service Required triggered.
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Right Malfunction gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
Service Required triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-

tain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Left Side Curtain cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side Cur‐ The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
tain Airbag Mal‐ unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
function Service gered.
Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult
ual
or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 47).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classifi-
cation System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
Z

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-

tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 47).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Corner‐
(Y page 114).
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering or
Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
(Y page 114).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 114).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
Check Front Left
(Y page 114).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
(Y page 114).
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 114).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 114).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

License Plate Lamp
b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.

Check Left Fog
Lamp or Check
Right Fog Lamp
Z

b The rear fog lamp is defective.

Rear Fog Lamp
(Y page 114).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 114).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light
(Y page 114).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 114).
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
Check Left Daytime

Running Light or
Check Right Day‐
time Running Light

b The active light function is defective.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-
played.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Z
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See Opera‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 285).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 283).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 284).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
Z

ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break!
X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavail‐ Possible causes are:
able See Opera‐ Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
tor's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Speed Limit Assist is operational again.
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 176).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 176).
Radar Sensors Deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Opera‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 209).
tor's Manual
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
sage disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Unavail‐ Rthe sensors are dirty.
able See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tor's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
sage disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 291).
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
Park Assist Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
celed fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 181).

Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
ative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately ten minutes (Y page 181).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 168). If it was
deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 168).
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
rently Unavailable Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's Man‐
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirty
ual
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 291).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may also
Inoperative have failed.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Inactive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 170).
Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 166).
Tires

Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 321).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 323).
Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 296).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 321).
Z

Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
function wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Tire Press. Moni‐ Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
tor Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni‐ The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

tor Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle

Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
Malfunction being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
Start Engine position N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D

Depress Brake and without starting the engine.
Start Engine X Start the engine.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to

the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then
can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the
parking lock remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can
only shift out of position P into another transmission position
when the engine is running.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.
Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or
in P D.
Risk of Vehicle A warning tone also sounds.
Rolling Away X Shift the transmission to position P.
Z

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift The vehicle is moving.

to 'P' when Vehi‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
cle is Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
Reversing Not Pos‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back
sible Service up.
Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stop Vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated.

to P Leave Engine X Drive on carefully.
Running The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the
display message has disappeared.

Trans. Oil Overhea‐ AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.
ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive
Care program are no longer available. The engine power output is
reduced.
X Allow the vehicle to cool down.
4matic Currently 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicle is
Unavailable only driven by the front wheels.
X Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again
and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Z

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Oper‐ G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the winter
months, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. In this case, the Check Washer Fluid display mes-
sage may appear in the multifunction display.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 286).
Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 243
SmartKey

+ You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
+ The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
+ The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
belt warning lamp lights
up for six seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warn-
ing tone sounds for up
to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
Z
244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Safety systems

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- There is a risk of an accident.
ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-
function.
display.
! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-

The yellow ABS warning tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION
lamp is lit while the ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
engine is running. Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.
Z

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION

The yellow ABS warning ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec-
lamp is lit while the tronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start
engine is running. assist, for example, are therefore also deactivated.
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.

! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVEN-
The yellow ABS warning TION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, the
lamp is lit while the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available
engine is running. A either.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION
J (Canada only) PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS,
÷å! EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not
available either.
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP® ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
and ESP® OFF warning G WARNING
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
increase.
display.
Z

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).
å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to

®
The yellow ESP OFF skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
warning lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is running.
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M SPORT handling mode is activated.

AMG vehicles only: G WARNING
The yellow SPORT han-
dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle.
engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations
(Y page 69).

÷å ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PRE-
The yellow ESP® and VENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
ESP® OFF warning not available due to a malfunction.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
÷å ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
The yellow ESP® and unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTION
lamps are lit while the ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.
engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
Z

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red indicator lamp
for the electric parking
brake flashes or lights
up and/or the yellow
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
The red SRS warning tem).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
display.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 40).
Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the
Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be
in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-
ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp
lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal require-
ments. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in
the state in which you are currently driving.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is run-
ning.
æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the engine is run- X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
ning. cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant warn- defective.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
perature gauge is at the paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
Z

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may
ing lamp comes on be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-
while the engine is run- tioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 285). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-
The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may
ing lamp comes on be too low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
display.

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 285). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
Driving systems

· The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance warn- selected.
ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance.
the vehicle is in motion.
· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
For further information about the distance warning function of
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 64).
For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS (Y page 67).
Z
Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
display.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 321).
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
255

Loading guidelines ............................ 256
Stowage areas .................................. 256
Features ............................................. 262
Stowage and features

256 Stowage areas
Useful information The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-

cle are dependent on the distribution of the
i This Operator's manual describes all load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
models and all standard and optional equip- should observe the following notes when
ment of your vehicle available at the time of transporting a load:
publication of the Operator's manual. RNever exceed the maximum permissible
Country-specific differences are possible. gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
Please note that your vehicle may not be weight rating of the vehicle (including occu-
equipped with all features described. This pants). The values are specified on the vehi-
also applies to safety-related systems and cle identification plate on the B-pillar of the
functions. driver's door.
i Read the information on qualified special- RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
ist workshops (Y page 26). objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-
Loading guidelines sible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
G WARNING upper edge of the seat backrests.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or RAlways place the load against the rear or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip front seat backrests. Make sure that the
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle seat backrests are securely locked into
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- place.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
den change in direction. seats if possible.
Always store objects so that they cannot be RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or nets to transport loads and luggage.
loads against slipping or tipping before the RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
journey. materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
G WARNING RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust for protection.
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a Stowage areas
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening Stowage space
open.
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
ing or abruptly changing directions.
Stowage areas 257
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be Eyeglasses compartment

flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256). X To open: press marking :.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
Stowage compartments in the front is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Glove box Stowage compartment in the center con-
sole
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;. Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards XTo open: press the marking on cover :.
until it engages. i Depending on the vehicle equipment,
there may be an ashtray in the center con-
i There is a pen holder at the top of the sole instead of a storage compartment.
glove box flap.
Z
258 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment in front of the arm- or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or
rest (vehicles with automatic transmis- COMAND Operating Instructions).
sion)
Stowage compartment under the driver's
seat and front-passenger seat
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow-
age compartment, the cover may not be able
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever for the stowage compartment. Stow and
X To open: press the marking on cover :. secure heavy objects in the trunk.
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the The maximum permissible load of the stow-
insert for cleaning. When removing the age compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).
insert you will have to overcome some
slight resistance.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To open: pull handle : up and fold

cover ; forwards.
X To open: on vehicles with moveable armr-

ests, make sure that the armrest is in the
rearmost position.
X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

armrest can be moved backwards or for-
wards in a longitudinal direction.
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
USB connection or a Media Interface is
installed in the stowage compartment. A
Media Interface is a universal interface for
portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®
Stowage areas 259
Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear center
console

X To open: fold down seat armrest :.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 99).
X To open: pull down the top of stowage
compartment : by the edge of the handle.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.
Parcel nets
Parcel nets are located:
Rin the front-passenger footwell
Ron the back of the driver's and the front- X Slide locking mechanism = in the direc-
passenger seat tion of the arrow.
Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk X Swing flap ; fully to the side.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256) Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
and the safety notes regarding stowage X To close: swing flap ; in the trunk back
spaces (Y page 256). until it engages.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
Through-loading facility in the rear

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256). Rear bench seat through-loading fea-
ture
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
Z
260 Stowage areas
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be X Fold backrest : forwards.

pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The back if necessary.
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat

backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear

compartment forwards, make sure that the X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt
rear compartment armrest and the extender :.
cupholder are folded in. They may other-
wise be damaged. Folding the rear seat backrest back
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256).
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

and back
Folding the rear seat backrest forward
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forwards separately to
increase the trunk capacity.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints visible.
(Y page 100). X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat (Y page 100).
forward if necessary. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han- back if necessary.
dle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
Stowage areas 261
Securing cargo X To open: pull handle : up.
Cargo tie-down rings

Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 256).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.

RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads. To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunk
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
floor.
or corners. X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost to
RPad sharp edges for protection. rain trough ; and pull it out.
: Cargo tie-down rings X To insert: place the trunk floor at the bot-
tom in the center.
X Hold sides of trunk floor = and press in the
Stowage well under the trunk floor
direction of the arrow until it engages in
Under the trunk floor you can find a bracket hooks ?.
for TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Z
262 Features
Never exceed the maximum roof load and Features

adjust your driving style.
Cup holder
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you Important safety notes
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. G WARNING
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi- The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
cle. whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
Position the load on the roof rack in such a traveling, the container may be flung around
way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
age even when it is in motion. pants may come into contact with the liquid
Depending on the vehicle equipment, and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
ensure that when the roof carrier is instal- be distracted from the traffic conditions and
led you can: you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
Ropen
a risk of an accident and injury.
the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel fully Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
Ropen the trunk lid fully
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
The maximum roof load is 165 lbs (75 kg). tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load may become detached from the vehicle. G WARNING
You must therefore ensure that you observe If you do not correctly store objects in the
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
instructions. around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
Attaching the roof carrier ing or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
X Fold covers : upwards. the right size and which have lids. The
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor- drinks could otherwise spill.
age points under covers :. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256).
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features 263
The stowage compartments in the doors pro- Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
vide space for bottles:
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l) on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
Cup holder in the front-compartment
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
center console
holder could be damaged.
The cup holder and the rubber mat under-

neath can be removed for cleaning. Clean
them with clean, lukewarm water only.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
of cup holder : on the driver's and front- X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back
passenger sides until they release. until it engages.
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can
be removed.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
X To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage com-
partment. Insert the cup holder so that the
wedge of the upper section of cup
holder : faces forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Z
264
Stowage and features Features
: Mirror light Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage

; Bracket compartment
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket X To open: push the lower section of
? Vanity mirror cover :.
A Mirror cover The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ;
Vanity mirror in the sun visor and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert =
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
into the holder until it engages.
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up. i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can
use the resulting compartment for stow-
Glare from the side age.
X Fold down the sun visor.
Rear-compartment ashtray
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
stowage space could be damaged. X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
the direction of arrow ? until it audibly
releases.
X Lift insert ; up and out.
X To install the insert: install insert ; from
above into the holder and press down until
it engages.
Features 265
Cigarette lighter 12 V sockets

G WARNING Points to observe before use
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
heating element or the socket of the cigarette tion lock (Y page 141).
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls ries include such items as lamps or chargers
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to for mobile phones.

objects, for example If you use the sockets for long periods when
There is a risk of fire and injury. the engine is switched off, the battery may
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. discharge.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
out of reach of children. Never leave children on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
unsupervised in the vehicle. the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
Your attention must always be focused on the
ensures that there is sufficient power to
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
start the engine.
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage

compartment
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Vehicles with a cover over the stowage compart-
ment
X To open: push the lower section of
X To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
Z
266 Features
mbrace
General notes
You must have a license agreement to acti-
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
system is activated and operational. To log in,
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,

Vehicles without a cover over the stowage com- contact one of the following telephone hot-
partment lines:
X Lift up the cover of socket :. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Socket in the rear-compartment center (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
console RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent to
you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log
onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
X Pull cover : out by its top edge. available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Ra service subscription is available
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
Socket in the trunk
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Features 267
The mbrace system Have the system checked at the nearest

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
the following service hotlines:
follows:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
or
RCanada: Customer Service at
X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- 1-888-923-8367
tem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g.: Emergency call
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
G WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
USA only: you can find information and a
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
description of all available features under
emergency if:
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
System self-test cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
After you have switched on the ignition, the
road
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
seen by other road users, particularly when
ted if one of the following occurs:
dark or in poor visibility conditions
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does There is a risk of an accident and injury.
not come on during the system self-test.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Assistance button does not light up during Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
self-diagnosis of the system. cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call vehicle in accordance with national regula-
button does not light up during self-diag- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
nosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the You must have a license agreement to acti-
following buttons continues to light up red vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
after the system self-diagnosis: system is activated and operational. To reg-
- SOS button
ister, press the ï MB Info call button. If
any of the steps mentioned are not carried
- F Roadside Assistance call button
out, the system may not be activated.
- ï MB Info call button
If you have questions about the activation,
RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐ contact one of the following telephone hot-
erative or Service Not Activated lines:
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
above, the system may not operate as expec-
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
have to be summoned by other means. 1-888-923-8367
Z
268 Features
General notes In this case, summon assistance by other

An emergency call is dialed automatically if an means.
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is Making an emergency call
triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-

tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the X To initiate an emergency call manually:
Call Connected message appears in the press cover : briefly to open.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
All important information on the emergency is The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
transmitted, for example: flashes until the emergency call is conclu-
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- ded.
mined by the GPS system) X Wait for a voice connection to the
RVehicle identification number Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
RInformation on the severity of the accident ter.
Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- X After the emergency call, close cover :.
tiated, a voice connection is automatically
i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-
established between the Customer Assis-
ble, mbrace will not be able to make the
tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
immediately after pressing the SOS button,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- you will not know whether mbrace placed
ter attempts to get more information on the the emergency call. In this case, always
emergency. summon assistance by other means.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately Roadside Assistance button
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
Features 269
X Press Roadside Assistance button :. i The system has not been able to initiate a
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz roadside assistance call, if:
Customer Assistance Center. Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance tance call button : is flashing continu-
button : flashes while the call is active. ously.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐ Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
necting Call message. The audio output Benz Customer Assistance Center was
is muted. established.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ This can occur if the relevant mobile phone

nected message appears in the multifunction network is not available, for example.
display. The Call Failed message appears in the
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception multifunction display.
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
for example: multifunction steering wheel.
or
RCurrent location of the vehicle
X Press the corresponding button for ending
RVehicle identification number
a phone call on the audio system or on
i The audio system or COMAND display COMAND.
indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu MB Info call button
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center can ascertain the nature of the prob-
lem (Y page 273).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- X Press MB Info call button :.
Benz technician or makes arrangements for This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Customer Assistance Center.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
You may be charged for services such as flashes while the connection is being made.
repair work and/or towing. The multifunction display shows the Con‐
Further details are available in your mbrace necting Call message. The audio system
manual. is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
Z
270 Features
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception Call priority

are available, the system transfers data to the
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
for example:
call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
RCurrent location of the vehicle gency call will take priority and override all
RVehicle identification number other active calls.
i The audio system or COMAND display The indicator lamp of the respective button
indicates that a call is active. During the flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
call, you can change to the navigation menu

by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
for example. Center.
Voice output is not available. All other calls can be ended by pressing:
A voice connection is established between Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance ing wheel
Center and the vehicle occupants. Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys-
You receive information about operating your tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone
vehicle, about the nearest authorized call
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- i When a call is initiated, the audio system
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
USA only: you can find further information on connected to COMAND. However, if you
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at want to use your mobile phone, do so only
http://www.mbusa.com. when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
i The system has not been able to initiate location.
an MB Info call, if:
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-
ton : is flashing continuously. Downloading destinations
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- Downloading destinations gives you access
Benz Customer Assistance Center was to a database with over 15 million points of
established. interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
network is not available, for example. know the destination, the address can be
The Call Failed message appears in the downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
multifunction display. location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-
tant destinations in the vicinity.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
Furthermore, you can download routes with
multifunction steering wheel.
up to 20 way points.
or
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
X Press the corresponding button for ending to the address entered.
a phone call on the audio system or on
The system calculates the route and subse-
COMAND.
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
i If you select No
No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
Features 271
i The destination download function is i Example:

available if the relevant mobile phone net- If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
work is available and data transfer is pos- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
sible. will be sent to your vehicle.
i The destination download function can X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with Enter the e-mail address you specified
a navigation system. when setting up your mbrace account into
Route Assistance the corresponding field.

X Click "Send".
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-
age and cannot be purchased separately. i Information on specific commands such
i You can also use the Route Assistance as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
function if your vehicle is not equipped with on the website.
a navigation system. Calling up destination addresses
Within the framework of this service, you X Switch on the ignition.
receive a professional and reliable form of The destination address is loaded into the
navigation support without having to leave vehicle's navigation system.
your vehicle. A display message appears, asking
The customer service representative finds a whether navigation should be started.
suitable route depending on your vehicle's X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
current position and the desired destination. the COMAND controller and press W to
You will then be guided live through the cur- confirm.
rent route section. The system calculates the route and sub-
sequently starts the route guidance with
Search & Send the address entered.
General notes i If you select No
No, the address can be saved
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle in the address book.
must be equipped with mbrace and a navi-
i If you have sent more than one destina-
gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser-
tion address, each individual destination
vice subscription must be completed.
must be confirmed separately.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
vice. A destination address which is found on i Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace
sent.
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Specifying and sending the destination cles with mbrace and activated mbrace
address accounts:
X Go to the website http:// If multiple vehicles are registered under the
www.maps.google.com and enter a desti- same e-mail address, the destination will
nation address into the entry field. be sent to all the vehicles.
X To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the
website.
Z
272 Features
Vehicle remote opening may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
remotely.
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available. X Contact the following service hotlines:
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
Benz Customer Assistance Center. tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

The vehicle can be immediately opened (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
remotely within four days of the ignition being RCanada: Customer Service at
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock- 1-888-923-8367
ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After You will be asked for your password.
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened The next time you are inside the vehicle and
remotely. you switch on the ignition, the Doors
X Contact the following service hotlines: Locked Remotely message appears in the
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- multifunction display.
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 locked via:
RCanada: Customer Service at Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
1-888-923-8367 section
You will be asked for your password. Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed Blackberry)
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer To do this, you will need your identification
Assistance Center. number and password.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
i The vehicle remote closing feature is
opened via:
available when the relevant mobile phone
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" network is available and data connection is
section possible.
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry) Stolen vehicle recovery service
To do this, you will need your identification If your vehicle has been stolen:
number and password.
X Notify the police.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if The police will issue a numbered incident
the corresponding mobile phone network is report.
accessible. X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Vehicle remote closing ter together with your PIN.
The remote closing feature can be used when The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you Center then tries to locate the system. The
are no longer nearby. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter contacts you and the local law enforce-
The vehicle can then be locked by the
ment agency if the vehicle is located.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
However, only the law enforcement agency
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote closing
Features 273
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated When the diagnosis is completed, the Send
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice
Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto- connection may be//interrupted dur‐
matically notified. ing data transfer) message appears. The
vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis Assistance center.
X Press OK to confirm the message.
With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
sis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance center can provide improved sup- Assistance center is terminated.

port for problems with your vehicle. During an You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Transferring data... message.
Customer Assistance center. The customer The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
service representative can use the received Assistance center.
data to decide what kind of assistance is Depending on what the customer service rep-
required. You are then, for example, guided to resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- nection is re-established after the transfer is
ter or a recovery vehicle is called. complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, mail or phone.
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-
center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐ function diagnosis include, for example:
tance Connected message in the COMAND
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
display. If the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis can be started, the Request for Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
vehicle diagnosis received. Start the COMAND display shows a message
vehicle diagnosis? message appears in about various special offers at your work-
the display. shop.
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
X Confirm the message with Yes Yes.
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
etc. If applicable, you will receive informa-
start ignition message appears, turn tion on special offers in the e-mail.
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
USA only: this information can also be
lock (Y page 141).
called up under "Owners Online" at http://
X When the Please follow the instruc‐
www.mbusa.com.
tions received by phone and move
Information on Roadside Assistance
your vehicle to a safe position.
(Y page 23).
message appears, follow the customer ser-
vice representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears. Downloading routes
If you select Cancel
Cancel, the vehicle remote Downloading routes allows you to transfer
malfunction diagnosis is canceled com- and save predefined routes in the navigation
pletely. system. To do this, an SD memory card must
The vehicle operating state check begins. be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
activated. message. the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving.
Z
274 Features
A route can be prepared and sent either by a Geo fencing

customer service representative or via the
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
mbrace portal on the Internet.
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
Each route can include up to 20 way points. be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-
Once a route has been received by the navi- daries of the selected areas. You can select
gation system, you will see the <route the way in which you receive this information
name> has been saved to memory card. beforehand. Possible options include text
Do you want to start route guidance? message, e-mail or an automated call.
message in the COMAND display. The route is
The area can be determined as either a circle
saved to the SD memory card.

or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
X To start route guidance: select YesYes. You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
An overview of the route is shown in the ously. Different settings are possible for each
display. area.
i If you select No
No, the saved route can be USA only: these settings can be called up
called up later via the navigation menu. under "Owners Online" at http://
X Select Start
Start. www.mbusa.com.
Route guidance is started. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service representa-
i Downloaded and saved data can be called tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
up again in COMAND.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
You can find further information in the sep- text message.
arate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
Speed alert
With this function, you can trigger the vehi-
You can define the upper speed limit, which cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
cle, a message will be sent to the Customer lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance alarm switches off.
Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options Garage door opener
include text message, e-mail or an automated
General notes
call.
The data you receive contains the following The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-
information: ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
Rthe location where the speed limit was ate up to three different door and gate sys-
exceeded tems.
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
Use the integrated garage door opener only
exceeded on garage doors that:
Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
ded Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
Features 275
control. Please also read the operating the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
instructions for the garage door system. out sufficient ventilation.
When programing a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the Programing
engine while programing.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible Programing buttons
with the integrated garage door opener. If you Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
have difficulty programing the integrated (Y page 275).
garage door opener, contact an authorized

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
compatible products is also available online ror
at http://www.homelink.com. Garage door remote control A is not inclu-
Notes on the declaration of conformity ded with the integrated garage door opener.
(Y page 25). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 tion lock (Y page 141).
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
control the garage door drive.
Important safety notes X To start programing mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? of the inte-
G WARNING grated garage door opener.
When you operate or program the garage door The garage door opener is now in program-
with the integrated garage door opener, per- ing mode. After a short time, indicator
sons in the range of movement of the garage lamp : lights up yellow.
door can become trapped or struck by the Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
garage door. There is a risk of injury. as button ;, = or ? is programed for the
When using the integrated garage door first time. If the selected button has already
opener, always make sure that nobody is been programed, indicator lamp : will
within the range of movement of the garage only light up yellow after ten seconds have
door. elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
G WARNING lamp : flashes yellow.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X To program the remote control: point
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
garage door remote control A towards
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
Z
276 Features
X Press and hold button B on remote control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. tion lock (Y page 141).
When indicator lamp : lights up green: X Get out of the vehicle.
programing is finished. X Press the programing button on the door
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- drive unit.
graming was successful. The next step is to Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
synchronize the rolling code. tiate the next step.
X Release button B on remote control A for
X Get into the vehicle.
the garage door drive system.
X Press previously programed button ;, =

If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the correspond- or ? of the integrated garage door opener
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When until the door closes.
doing so, vary the distance between remote The rolling code synchronization is then
control A and the rear-view mirror. complete.
The required distance between remote Notes on programing the remote control
control A and the integrated garage door Canadian radio frequency laws require a
opener depends on the garage door drive "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
system. Several attempts might be neces- signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
sary. You should test every position for at Therefore, these signals may not last long
least 25 seconds before trying another enough for the integrated garage door
position. opener. The signal is not recognized during
Synchronizing the rolling code programing. Comparable with Canadian law,
some U.S. garage door openers also feature a
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" "break".
(Y page 275).
Proceed as follows:
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage Rif you live in Canada
door system with the integrated garage door Rif you have difficulties programing the
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you garage door opener (regardless of where
will need to use the programing button on the you live) when using the programing steps
door drive control panel. The programing but- X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
ton may be placed at different locations the integrated garage door opener.
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
located on the door drive unit on the garage up yellow.
ceiling. X Release the button.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- X Press button B of garage door remote
graming of additional remote controls", control A for two seconds, then release it
before carrying out the following steps. for two seconds.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the X Press button B again for two seconds.
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the remote control A until indicator lamp :
door or gate. lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programing is finished.
Features 277
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- same programing steps with this remote
graming was successful. The next step is to control. Before performing these steps,
synchronize the rolling code. make sure that new batteries have been
X Release button B of remote control A of installed in garage door drive remote con-
the garage door drive. trol A.
If indicator lamp : blinks red: repeat the RNote that some remote controls only trans-
programing process for the corresponding mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
so, vary the distance between remote con- Press button B on remote control A again

trol A and the rear-view mirror. before transmission ends.
The required distance between remote RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
control A and the integrated garage door opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
opener depends on the garage door drive tion/transmission.
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at Opening/closing the garage door
least 25 seconds before trying another
position. After it has been programed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
Problems when programing the garage door system remote control.
If you are experiencing problems programing Please also read the operating instructions
the integrated garage door opener on the for the garage door system.
rear-view mirror, take note of the following X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
instructions: tion lock (Y page 141).
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
garage door drive remote control A and programed to operate the garage door.
whether it is supported. The transmitter Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
frequency can usually be found on the back cator lamp : lights up green.
of the garage door drive remote control. Garage door system with a rolling code:
The integrated garage door opener is com- indicator lamp : flashes green.
patible with devices that have units which The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
operate in the frequency range of 280 to as the button is pressed. The transmission is
433 MHz. halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
RReplace the batteries in garage door indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press but-
remote control A. This increases the like- ton ;, = or ? again if necessary.
lihood that garage door remote control A
will transmit a strong and precise signal to Clearing the memory
the integrated garage door opener in the
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
rear-view mirror.
integrated garage door opener before selling
RWhen programing, hold remote control A
the vehicle.
at varying distances and angles from the
button that you are programing. Try various
angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
Z
278 Features

X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Compass
Calling up the compass
The compass displays in which compass
direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE
NE SE, S, SW
SW, W or NW
NW. North America zone map
To receive a correct display in rear-view mir-

ror :, the compass must be calibrated and
the magnetic field zone set.
Setting the compass

South America zone map
X Determine your position using the following
zone maps. X Push a round pen into opening =
(Y page 278) for approximately three sec-
onds.
The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ; (Y page 278).
X To select the zone: push a round pen into
opening = (Y page 278) until the desired
zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in com-
pass display ; (Y page 278) changes
direction, the zone has been selected.
Features 279
Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-

voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear X Slide the seat backwards.
window defroster. X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. well.
X Switch on the ignition. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
X Push a round pen into opening =

ers ;.
(Y page 278) for approximately six sec- X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
onds, until symbol C is shown in compass ers ;.
display ; (Y page 278). X Remove the floormat.
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ; (Y page 278).
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
Z
280
281

Engine compartment ........................ 282
Maintenance ...................................... 286
Care .................................................... 287
Maintenance and care

282 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts
Hood G WARNING
Important safety notes The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
G WARNING components which are under voltage, you
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
Never unlatch the hood while driving. tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may Opening the hood
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of G WARNING
movement of the hood. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Open and close the hood only when no one is
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
within its range of movement.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
G WARNING
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
touch only the components described in the
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
following.
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury. G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
Let an overheated engine cool down before
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Engine compartment 283
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
not folded away from the windshield. You X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into
could otherwise damage the windshield yellow retaining clip =.
wipers or the hood.
Closing the hood
X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellow
retaining clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it
into bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height

of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are properly engaged. Do not press the hood
switched off. closed. Open the hood again and close it
X Pull release lever : on the hood. with a little more force.
The hood is released.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
X Reach into the gap between the hood and be in a different location.
the radiator trim and press hood catch When checking the oil level:
lever ; to the left. Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
X Raise the hood.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Z
284 Engine compartment
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- G WARNING

stick If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
G WARNING ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
Working in the engine compartment poses a thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
risk of injury. ponents before starting the engine.
following. When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to

the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
Example caused by the following:
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
tube.
not been specifically approved for the
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
service system
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
tube to the stop, and take it out again. the interval for replacement specified by
If the level is between MIN mark = and the service system has been exceeded
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
Rusing engine oil additives.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
oil. engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
Adding engine oil excess engine oil siphoned off.
G WARNING
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
following.
Engine compartment 285
ture is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in

damage to the engine or to the engine cool-
ing system.
Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil. Example
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil. Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
cle is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely. tion lock (Y page 141).
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- X Check the coolant temperature display in
stick (Y page 284). the instrument cluster.

The coolant temperature must be below
Further information on engine oil 104 ‡ (40 †).
(Y page 349). X Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
Checking and adding other service
products clockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
Checking coolant level X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
G WARNING If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
ticularly when the engine is warm. When coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
as it will go.
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape. For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 351).
! The coolant may only be checked and cor-
rected when the engine is cool (coolant
temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Check-
ing the coolant when the coolant tempera-
Z
286 Maintenance
Windshield washer system Maintenance

G WARNING ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Working in the engine compartment poses a informs you of the next service due date.
risk of injury. Information on the type of service and service
Where possible, let the engine cool down and intervals (see the separate Maintenance
touch only the components described in the Booklet).
following. You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
G WARNING http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-
mable. If it comes into contact with hot engine i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
components or the exhaust system it could does not show any information on the
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 283).
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
Example
You can obtain further information from an
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Add the premixed washer fluid. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck does not take into account any periods of
until it engages. time during which the battery is disconnec-
ted.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message Maintaining the time-dependent service
appears in the multifunction display prompt- schedule:
ing you to refill the washer fluid (Y page 242). X Note down the service due date displayed
Further information on windshield washer in the multifunction display before discon-
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 352). necting the battery.
or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Care 287
Hiding a service message Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces
X Press the a or % button on the steer-
Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ing wheel.
ods
Displaying service messages Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
X Switch on the ignition. replaced or changed more frequently. Under
X Press the = or ; button to select the arduous operating conditions, the tires must
Serv. menu. be checked more often. Further information
X Press the 9 or : button to select the can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.

pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multi- Driving abroad
function display.
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
Information about Service obtain further information from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
val display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Care
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
ting can be corrected at a qualified special- General notes
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
erwise lead to increased wear and damage
ner.
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset of the following:
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rdry, rough or hard cloths
after the service work has been carried out.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
You can also obtain further information on
Rsolvents
maintenance work, for example.
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Special service requirements
Do not scrub.
The specified maintenance interval takes only Do not touch the surfaces or protective
the normal operation of the vehicle into films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
account. Under arduous operating conditions scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- damage the surfaces and protective film.
nance work must be carried out more fre-
quently, for example: ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
ate stops
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel increased corrosion of the brake discs and
short distances brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Z
288 Care
should drive for a few minutes after clean- Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the are fully closed.
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
vehicle can then be parked. (the OFF button has been pressed/the
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for airflow control is set to position 0).
retaining the quality in the long term. Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- 0.
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
Exterior care
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Automatic car wash cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
G WARNING wax from the windshield and the wiper
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
After the vehicle has been washed, brake shield.
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored. Washing by hand
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function In some countries, washing by hand is only
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- allowed at wash bays that are specially
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- designed for this purpose. Observe the legal
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC requirements in all countries concerned.
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
ing or other similar situations: vehicle in direct sunlight.
Rwhen towing the vehicle X Use a soft sponge to clean.
Rin the car wash X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can gentle jet of water.
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
! Make sure that the automatic transmis- X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sion is in position N when washing your
sponge frequently.
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
cle could be damaged if the transmission is
in another position. thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
! Make sure that: paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Care 289
Power washers ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
G WARNING vehicle can then be parked.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage Cleaning the paintwork
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- ! Do not affix:
edly. There is a risk of an accident. Rstickers
Do not use power washers with circular jet Rfilms
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged Rmagnetic plates or similar items
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
diately.

damage the paintwork.
! Always maintain a distance of at least X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the while avoiding rubbing too hard.
power washer nozzle. Information about X Soak insect remains with insect remover
the correct distance is available from the and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
equipment manufacturer. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
Move the power washer nozzle around off the treated areas afterwards.
when cleaning your vehicle. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
Do not aim directly at any of the following: oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Rtires with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Relectrical components
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Rbattery
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Rconnectors
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
Rlights
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Rseals
The following cannot always be completely
Rtrim
repaired:
Rventilation slots
Rscratches
Damaged seals or electrical components
Rcorrosive deposits
can lead to leaks or failures.
Rareas affected by corrosion
Cleaning the wheels Rdamage caused by inadequate care
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist work-
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
shop.
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom-
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly This is the case approximately every three to
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel five months, depending on the climate con-
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause ditions and the care product used.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you if the paintwork has become dull, then the
should drive for a few minutes after clean- paintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,
Z
290 Care
please use the paint cleaner recommend and Cleaning the windows
approved by Mercedes Benz.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
G WARNING
on the hood while the hood is hot. You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
Matte finish care windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy Always switch off the windshield wipers and
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
shine. wiper blades.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
effect: the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,

you will damage the hood.
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-
rials. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
RFrequent use of car washes.
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
not touch the insides of the windows with
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
wax. These products are only suitable for windows.
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
with matte finish leads to considerable sur- windshield and the rear window at regular
face damage (shiny, spotted areas). intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
Always have paintwork repairs carried out and pollen may under certain circumstan-
at a qualified specialist workshop. ces prevent water from draining away. This
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax can lead to corrosion damage and damage
treatment under any circumstances. to electronic components.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect product that is recommended and
treatment. approved by Mercedes-Benz.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish. Cleaning wiper blades
i The vehicle should preferably be washed G WARNING
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo You could become trapped by the windshield
and plenty of water. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz injury.
care products. Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
Care 291
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from Cleaning the sensors
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
! If you clean the sensors with a power
you will damage the hood.
washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the wiper blade could be damaged. the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
available from the equipment manufac-
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
turer.
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from

the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior Cleaning the rear view camera
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
around the rear view camera with a power
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
washer.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or clean-
ing cloths.
Z
292 Care
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and Interior care

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock. Cleaning the display
X To open the cover of the rear view cam- ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
era: with the audio system/COMAND acti- lowing:
vated, press the W button. Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
X Select System by turning cVd the audio
Rabrasive cleaning agents
system/COMAND controller and press W
Rcommercially-available household clean-
to confirm.
ing agents
X Select Rear view camera and press W to
confirm. These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
X Select Open camera cover and press W

when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
to confirm.
ble damage to the display.
The rear view camera cover opens.
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
water and a soft cloth to clean camera it is switched off and has cooled down.
lens :. X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and
i The cover of the camera closes automat- TFT/LCD display cleaner.
ically when the SmartKey is at position 0 in X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
the ignition lock. fiber cloth.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe Cleaning the plastic trim

Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may G WARNING
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You Care products and cleaning agents containing
can restore the original shine of the exhaust solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
ter and after washing. come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- Do not use any care products and cleaning
based cleaning agents such as sanitary agents to clean the cockpit.
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ces:
Rstickers
! AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes:
do not use chrome polish to polish black Rfilms
chromed screens. They will otherwise lose Rscented oil bottles or similar items
their silky black shine. Rub the screen using You can otherwise damage the plastic.
a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.
Commercially available engine oils, WD 40 ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or Ballistol are suitable oils. or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Care 293
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free covers. If used often, these can damage the
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. cover.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
i Note that regular care is essential to
ucts recommended and approved by ensure that the appearance and comfort of
Mercedes-Benz. the covers is retained over time.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
selector lever example:
Rdifferences in the texture
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been recom- Rmarks caused by growth and injury
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- material defects.
ments
! To retain the natural appearance of the
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents leather, observe the following cleaning
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- instructions:
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of RClean genuine leather covers carefully
damaging the surface. with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. ers down with a dry cloth.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are RMake sure that the leather does not
mostly made of anodized aluminum and become soaked. It may otherwise
can lose their shine if chrome polish is become rough and cracked.
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead ROnly use leather care agents that have
when cleaning the trim pieces. been tested and approved by Mercedes-
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you fied specialist workshop.
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
Seat covers of other materials
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Observe the following when cleaning:
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber moistened with a solution containing 1%

cloth. detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
products recommended and approved by moistened with a solution containing 1%

Mercedes-Benz. detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
Cleaning the seat covers
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
General notes results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen-
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp
uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
Z
294 Care
seat sections to avoid leaving visible

lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or a cleaning agent recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
295

Where will I find...? ........................... 296
Flat tire .............................................. 296
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 301
Jump-starting .................................... 305
Towing and tow-starting .................. 307
Fuses .................................................. 310
Breakdown assistance
296 Flat tire
Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

models and all standard and optional equip-
functions.
: Tire inflation compressor
; Towing eye
= Tire sealant filler bottle

Where will I find...? X Open the trunk lid.
Vehicle tool kit X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 261).
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 298).
General notes
i Towing eye ; is located under tire infla-
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
tion compressor :.
located in the stowage well under the trunk
floor.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
change tool kit is in the stowage well under X Open the trunk lid.
the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 261).
i Apart from certain country-specific varia- X Remove the tire-change tool kit.
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a The tire-change tool kit contains:
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- RJack
ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For
RLug wrench
more information on which tire changing
tools are required and approved to perform ROne pair of gloves
a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a RFolding wheel chock
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example: Flat tire
RJack Preparing the vehicle
RWheel chock Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RLug wrench
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-
erties) (Y page 297)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 296)
Flat tire 297
Information on changing/mounting a wheel sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
(Y page 336). next to the tire size designation, the load-
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and bearing capacity and the speed index
level ground, as far away as possible from (Y page 330).
traffic. MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. junction with an active tire pressure monitor.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away If the pressure loss warning message
(Y page 157). appears in the multifunction display:
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the RObserve the instructions in the display
straight-ahead position. messages (Y page 237).
X Switch off the engine. RCheck the tire for damage.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
lock. The maximum driving distance is approx-
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is
Make sure that they are not endangered as partially laden and approximately 18 miles
they do so. (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
area while a wheel is being changed. Any- tance possible depends upon:
one who is not directly assisting in the RSpeed
wheel change should, for example, stand RRoad condition
behind the barrier.
ROutside temperature
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
fic conditions when doing so. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving condi-
X Close the driver's door.
tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires through a moderate style of driving.
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the The maximum permissible distance which
factory. It is therefore recommended that can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
you additionally equip your vehicle with a the moment the tire pressure loss warning
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not appears in the multifunction display.
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. You must not exceed a maximum speed of
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- 50 mph (80 km/h).
fied specialist workshop.
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires:
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
properties) Rmarked "MOExtended"
General notes If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-
characteristics), you can continue to drive ure. Make sure that you use the proper size
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of and type (summer or winter tire).
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage. i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
MOExtended marking which appears on the
298 Flat tire
you additionally equip your vehicle with a G WARNING

TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not In the following situations, the tire sealant is
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
fied specialist workshop.
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
Important safety notes than those mentioned above.

Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
G WARNING Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
When driving in emergency mode, the driving on a flat tire.
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- There is a risk of an accident.
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, G WARNING

and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
tion. It must not come into contact with your
vehicle.
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
Stop driving in emergency mode if: inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
Ryou hear banging noises. from children. There is a risk of injury.
Rthevehicle starts to shake. If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. observe the following:
RESP® is intervening constantly. RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
workshop with regard to their further use. The oughly with clean water.
defective tire must be replaced in every case. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
TIREFIT kit and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
Important safety notes has come into contact with tire sealant.
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to attention immediately.

0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-
instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation
peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
compressor.
Flat tire 299
Using the TIREFIT kit mounting of tire inflation compressor ;

until the cap and both hooks engage.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part

Do not remove any foreign objects which X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
X
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or tire.
nails. X Screw filler hose D onto valve.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom- X Insert plug = into the socket of the ciga-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla- rette lighter (Y page 265) or into a 12 V
tion compressor from the stowage well power socket in your vehicle (Y page 265).
underneath the cargo compartment floor X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
(Y page 296). tion lock (Y page 141).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
X Press on/off switch ? on the tire inflation
the driver's field of vision. compressor to ON.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the The tire inflation compressor is switched
valve on the wheel with the defective tire. on. The tire is inflated.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the sor for longer than ten minutes at a time
bottom section of the tire inflation com- without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
pressor housing. The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into ated again once it has cooled down.
the mounting on yellow cap A of tire seal-
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
ant bottle : until the plug engages.
is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
see (Y page 300).
cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the
Z
300 Flat tire
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) ! After use, excess tire sealant may run out
is not achieved after a maximum of ten of the filler hose. This could cause stains.
minutes, see (Y page 300). Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
can then be removed like a layer of film. H Environmental note
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. workshop.
Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
has been achieved after ten minutes:
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
has not been achieved after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X
the faulty tire.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
X Very slowly drive forwards or back up inflation compressor.
approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pull away immediately.
X Pump up the tire again. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
29 psi). instrument cluster in the driver's field of
vision.
G WARNING X Stop after driving for approximately ten
If the required tire pressure is not reached minutes and check the tire pressure with
after the specified time, the tire is too badly the tire inflation compressor.
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the The tire pressure must now be at least
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- G WARNING
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. If the required tire pressure is not reached
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified after driving for a short period, the tire is too
specialist workshop. badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
Tire pressure reached tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
G WARNING acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
impairs the driving characteristics and is not specialist workshop.
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident. i In cases such as the one mentioned
You should therefore adapt your driving style above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
the specified maximum speed with a tire that (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-
has been repaired using tire sealant. ada).
Battery (vehicle) 301
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and hose replaced as soon as possible at a
Loading Information placard on the driver's qualified specialist workshop.
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
fuel filler flap for values. four years at a qualified specialist work-
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on shop.
the tire inflation compressor.
Battery (vehicle)
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installing. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
pressure release button : next to pres- thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
sure gauge ;. lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You
could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
Rbraking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
tire inflation compressor, press together
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
the locking tabs on the yellow cap.
should have all work involving the battery car-
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire For further information about ABS and ESP®,
sealant bottle. see (Y page 63) and (Y page 67).
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire G WARNING
inflation compressor. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
workshop and have the tire changed there. sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Z
302 Battery (vehicle)
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic water and seek medical attention.
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when Batteries contain dangerous
charging the battery as well as when jump- substances. It is against the
starting. law to dispose of them with
Always make sure that neither you nor the the household rubbish. They
battery is electrostatically charged. A build- must be collected separately
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for and recycled to protect the
example: environment.
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic Dispose of batteries in an
fibers environmentally friendly
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats manner. Take discharged
Rif you push or pull the battery across the batteries to a qualified spe-
carpet or other synthetic materials cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
teries.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ- ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or qualified specialist workshop.
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can Observe the service intervals in the Main-
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a cialist workshop for more information.
connected battery does not come into con- ! You should have all work involving the
tact with vehicle parts. battery carried out at a qualified specialist
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
tery. necessary for you to disconnect the battery
RIt is important that you observe the descri- yourself, make sure that:
bed order of the battery terminals when Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
connecting and disconnecting a battery. SmartKey. Check that all the indicator
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the lamps in the instrument cluster are off.
battery poles with identical polarity are Otherwise, electronic components, such
connected. as the alternator, may be damaged.
RIt is particularly important to observe the Ryou first remove the negative terminal
described order when connecting and dis- clamp and then the positive terminal
connecting the jumper cables. clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
terminals while the engine is running. tem may be damaged.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
G WARNING the transmission is locked in position P
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. cle is secured against rolling away. You
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean can then no longer move the vehicle.
over the battery. Keep children away from
Battery (vehicle) 303
The battery and the cover of the positive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
terminal clamp must be installed securely qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
during operation. mation.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- Have the battery condition of charge checked
tective measures when handling batteries. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
Risk of explosion. for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
Fire, open flames and smoking are Only replace a battery with a battery that has
prohibited when handling the bat- been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- vehicle and do not require any electrical
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
Wear suitable protective clothing, little energy, thus conserving battery
especially gloves, apron and face- power.
guard.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,
Rinse any acid spills immediately e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
with clear water. Contact a physi- have to:
cian if necessary.
Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,
Wear eye protection.
see the separate operating instructions).
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
Keep children away. the mirrors out once (Y page 104).
Charging the battery

Observe this Operator's Manual.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
For safety reasons, Mercedes–Benz recom-
risk of an explosion.
mends that you only use batteries that have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries have greater sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
impact resistance and as a result there is no ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
risk of acid burns to occupants when a battery Do not lean over a battery.
is damaged in an accident.
G WARNING
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
sufficiently charged. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
discharge over time if you do not use the over the battery. Keep children away from
vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You water and seek medical attention.
can also charge the battery with a charger
Z
304 Battery (vehicle)
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the

engine compartment (Y page 305).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor bat-
tery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 305).
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you
may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge
the battery. The service life of a thawed-out
battery may be shorter. The starting charac-
teristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only charge the installed battery with a bat-
tery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessory
battery charge unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It
permits the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion and availability. Read the battery charg-
er's operating instructions before charging
the battery.
Jump-starting 305
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek
medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
306 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.

Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Towing and tow-starting 307
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
started is greater than the permissible gross
G WARNING weight of your vehicle:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
Rthe engine is not running. over.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per-
or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 346).
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
Z
308 Towing and tow-starting
! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST The battery must be connected and charged.
PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- Otherwise, you:
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto- Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
matically in certain situations. To avoid the ignition lock
damage to the vehicle, deactivate these
Rcannot shift the transmission to position N.
systems in the following or similar situa-
tions: i Disarm the automatic locking feature
Rwhen towing the vehicle before the vehicle is towed (Y page 209).
Rin the car wash
You could otherwise be locked out when
pushing or towing the vehicle.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged. Installing/removing the towing eye
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery Installing the towing eye
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.

If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the front axle must be
raised or the entire vehicle raised and
transported.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
Example: towing eye mounting covers
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi- X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
cle. space.
The towing eye is located with the vehicle
! Vehicles with automatic transmission tool kit under the trunk floor (Y page 261).
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission. Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing
eye is beneath the tire inflation compres-
It is better to have the vehicle transported sor.
than to have it towed. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
When towing a vehicle, the transmission must direction of the arrow.
be in position N. X Take cover : off the opening.
X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-
wise to the stop.
Towing and tow-starting 309
Removing the towing eye Observe the important safety notes when
towing your vehicle with the front axle raised
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
(Y page 307).
X Position the top of cover : in the bumper
and press it in at the bottom until it
engages. Towing a vehicle with both axles on
X Place the towing eye in the stowage well the ground
under the trunk floor (Y page 261).
i In order to signal a change of direction
X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the
when towing with the hazard warning lamps
tire inflation compressor.
switched on, use the combination switch as
usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After reset-
Towing the vehicle with the front axle ting the combination switch, the hazard
raised warning lamp starts flashing again.
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be The automatic transmission automatically
towed with the front axle raised. shifts to position P when you open the driver's
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed or front-passenger door or when you remove
with either the front or the rear axle raised, the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
as doing so will damage the transmission. to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed you must observe the following points:
away with both axles on the ground or be loa-
ded up and transported. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
! The ignition must be switched off if the
tion lock.
vehicle is being towed with the front axle
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and
damage the brake system. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
tion lock. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the ignition lock.
brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Release the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- X Release the electric parking brake.
tion P. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Release the brake pedal. (Y page 111).
X Release the electric parking brake. It is important that you observe the safety
X Switch off the automatic locking instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 209). (Y page 307).
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 111).
Transporting the vehicle
tion lock and leave the SmartKey in the ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
ignition lock. wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Z
310 Fuses
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- nents on the circuit and their functions stop
tion lock. operating.
X Shift the transmission to position N. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by in the fuse allocation chart.
applying the electric parking brake. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
X Shift the transmission to position P. cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
tion lock and remove it. Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Secure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle Before changing a fuse
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 157).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Tow-starting (emergency engine X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
starting) tion lock and remove it (Y page 141). All
! Vehicles with automatic transmission indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must not be tow-started. You could other- must be off.
wise damage the automatic transmission. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
i You can find information on "Jump-start- RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
ing" under (Y page 305). left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
Fuses The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
Important safety notes the front-passenger footwell (Y page 311).
G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if Fuse box in the engine compartment
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
G WARNING
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
When the hood is open and the windshield
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
accident and injury.
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
new fuses having the correct amperage.
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
have the correct fuse rating for the system fuse box when the cover is open.
concerned. Only use fuses marked with an ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
"S". Otherwise, components or systems is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
could be damaged. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down the operation of the fuses.
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
Fuses 311
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
To open: remove the floormat from the
X
X To open: open clamps ;.
front-passenger side.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
arrow and remove it. direction of the arrow.
X To close: check whether the seal is seated X To release cover =, press retaining
correctly in cover :. clamp ;.
X Insert cover : at the back into openings X Fold out cover = in the direction of the
= on the fuse box. arrow to the catch.
X Fold down cover :. X Remove cover = forwards.
X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and

i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
close. lower right-hand side of cover =.
X Close the hood.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand
side of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock
audibly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
Z
312
313

Operation ........................................... 314
Winter operation ............................... 316
Tire pressure ..................................... 317
Loading the vehicle .......................... 324
Maximum load rating ....................... 327
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .......................................... 328
Tire labeling ....................................... 329
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 333
Changing a wheel ............................. 335
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 340
Wheels and tires

314 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
publication of the Operator's manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
Please note that your vehicle may not be being used correctly can impair operating
equipped with all features described. This safety.
also applies to safety-related systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved
functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i Read the information on qualified special- shop and inquire about:
ist workshops (Y page 26). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
(Y page 340).
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
Information on air pressure for the tires on

the wheel brakes or suspension components
your vehicle can be found:
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
Always replace wheels and tires with those tion placard on the B-pillar
that fulfill the specifications of the original Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
part. flap (Y page 156)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 317)
correct:
i Further information on wheels and tires
Rdesignation can be obtained at any qualified specialist
Rmodel workshop.
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Operation
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer Information on driving
Rmodel RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the
tire pressures and correct them if neces-
G WARNING sary.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. noises and unusual handling characteris-
There is a risk of accident. tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
Tires without run-flat characteristics: cate that the wheels or tires are damaged.
If you suspect that a tire is defective,
Rdo not drive with a flat tire.
reduce your speed immediately. Stop the
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your vehicle as soon as possible to check the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire
consult a qualified specialist workshop. damage could also be causing the unusual
Operation 315
handling characteristics. If you find no Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
signs of damage, have the wheels and tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. pressure as necessary (Y page 317).
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends, among other
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or things, on the following factors:
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive RDrivingstyle
over curbs, speed humps or similar eleva-
RTirepressure
tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse
RDistance covered
angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the
sidewalls, may be damaged.
Important safety notes on the tire
Regular checking of wheels and tires tread
G WARNING G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Wheels and tires

ditions. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
well as after driving off-road or on rough ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of should regularly check the tread depth and
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- the condition of the tread across the entire
age such as: width of all tires.
Rcuts in the tires Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rpunctures RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rtears in the tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rbulges on tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 315). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
into the tire tread.
Z
316 Winter operation
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by you additionally equip your vehicle with a
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
tread. They are visible once the tread depth is feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
case, the tire is so worn that it must be fied specialist workshop.
replaced.
Winter operation
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
type and make. specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
ferent type or make in the event of a flat section (Y page 336).
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 297). Driving with summer tires
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
the wheels. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
Wheels and tires
RAfter mounting new tires, break them in at braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
moderate speeds for the first 60 miles cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
(100 km), as they only reach their full per- cold temperatures could cause cracks to
formance after this distance. form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). G WARNING
RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
est, regardless of wear. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat and replace any damaged tires immediately.
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive M+S tires
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. G WARNING
MOExtended tires may only be used in con- M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
junction with an active tire pressure monitor ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and only on wheels specifically tested by and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
Mercedes-Benz. a risk of an accident.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
a flat tire (Y page 297). (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
factory. It is therefore recommended that are identified by the M+S marking.
Tire pressure 317
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- mends that you only use snow chains that
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- have been specially approved for your vehicle
ditions. Only these tires will allow driving by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to standard of quality.
function optimally in winter. These tires have If you intend to mount snow chains, please
been developed specifically for driving in bear the following points in mind:
snow. RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- wheel-tire combinations (Y page 340).
teristics. ROnly use snow chains when driving on
Always observe the maximum permissible roads completely covered by snow.
speed specified for the M+S tires you have Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-
mounted. ble when you come to a road that is not
Once the winter tires are mounted: snow-covered.
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 320). RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
X Restart the tire pressure monitor snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
(Y page 323). ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
Wheels and tires

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
Snow chains RWhen snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 181).
G WARNING
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
i You may wish to deactivate ESP®
(Y page 68) when pulling away with snow
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
chains installed. You can thereby allow the
to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
ieving an increased driving force (cutting
tires. There is a risk of an accident.
action).
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear
wheels Tire pressure
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the
Tire pressure specifications
front wheels.
G WARNING
! On some tire sizes there is not enough Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to following risks:
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
wheels". and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
mount snow chains on steel wheels, you traction.
may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
caps from the relevant wheels before
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
mounting the snow chains.
Z
318 Tire pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
and check the pressure of all the tires includ- speed conditions.
ing the spare wheel:
i Specifications shown in the examples of
Rmonthly, at least tire pressure tables are for illustration pur-
Rif the load changes poses only. Tire pressure specifications are
Rbefore beginning a long journey vehicle-specific and may deviate from the
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
data shown here. Tire pressure specifica-
off-road driving tions applicable to your vehicle are located
in your vehicle's tire pressure table.
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
Wheels and tires
labels described here.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
1.) Tire and Loading Information placard for this vehicle by the factory
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
cle (Y page 324).
pressure information following is only valid
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
tains the recommended tire pressures for laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures table for different numbers of occupants and
are valid for the maximum permissible load amounts of luggage. The actual number of
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle seats may differ.
speed.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

: Recommended tire pressures
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside of diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
the fuel filler flap. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and
The tire pressure table contains the recom- can be found on the tire sidewall
mended pressures for cold tires for various (Y page 330).
Tire pressure 319
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure

loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
If the tire pressures have been set to the does not permit any reliable conclusion about
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the tire pressure.
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to The tire temperature and pressure increase
the higher values: when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
Rif you want to drive with an increased load ent on the driving speed and the load.
and/or Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds sures when the tires are cold.
i The tire pressures for increased loads The tires are cold:
Wheels and tires

and/or higher road speeds, shown in the Rif the vehicle has been parked without
tire pressure table, may have a negative direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
effect on driving comfort. hours and
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and than 1 mile (1.6 km)
a sudden loss of pressure. The tire temperature changes depending on
For more information, contact a qualified spe- the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
cialist workshop. and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
Important notes on tire pressure 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
G WARNING the tire pressure if it is too low for the current
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the operating conditions. If you check the tire
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
pressure that is too low may result in a tire ing value will be higher than if the tires were
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
valve is leaking. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- cold tires:
tact a qualified specialist workshop. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
G WARNING Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire fuel filler flap
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
Z
320 Tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires ommended tire pressure for your vehicle

when adjusting the tire pressure
Underinflation (Y page 317).
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may: : Example: maximum permissible tire pres-

Rwear quickly and unevenly sure
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
Roverheat, leading to tire defects specific and may deviate from the values in
Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- the illustration.
Wheels and tires
teristics
Overinflation Checking the tire pressures
G WARNING Important safety notes

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst Observe the "Tire pressure information" sec-
because they are damaged more easily by tion (Y page 317).
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Information on air pressure for the tires on
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
your vehicle can be found:
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
accident. tion placard on the B-pillar
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
tires, including the spare wheel. flap

Rin the "Tire pressure information" section
Overinflated tires may:
Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- Checking tire pressures manually
teristics To determine and set the correct tire pres-
Rwear quickly and unevenly sure, proceed as follows:
Rbe more susceptible to damage
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort be checked.
Rincrease the braking distance X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire the recommended value on the Tire and
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
Tire pressure 321
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the driver's side of your vehicle. on the Tire and Loading Information placard
X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
the recommended value (Y page 317). sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by your vehicle has tires of a different size than
pressing down the metal pin in the valve the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then, Information placard or, if available, the tire
check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure label, you should determine the
pressure gauge. proper tire pressure for those tires.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
Tire Pressure Monitor
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
General notes you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
Wheels and tires

lead to tire failure.
sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
monitor only functions if the correct sensors
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
are installed on all wheels.
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Information on tire pressures is displayed in maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
the multifunction display. After a few minutes bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
of driving, the current tire pressure of each underinflation has not reached the level to
tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul- trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
tifunction display. sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
Example: current tire pressure display remain continuously illuminated. This
For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cle is started as long as the malfunction
cally" section (Y page 322). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
Important safety notes or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
G WARNING reasons, including the installation of incom-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), patible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked at least once every two wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure from functioning properly. Always check the
Z
322 Tire pressure
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one Further information can be found on
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to (Y page 237).
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to it may take more than ten minutes for the tire
function properly. pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire minute and then remaining lit. When the mal-
pressure to that recommended for cold tires function has been rectified, the tire pressure
which is suitable for the operating situation warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
(Y page 317). Note that the correct tire pres- driving.
sure for the current operating situation must
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
board computer may differ from those meas-
If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.
warning threshold for the warning message is
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
aligned to the reference values taught-in.
computer refer to those measured at sea
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-
ing the pressure of the cold tires
ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher
(Y page 323). The current pressures are
than those shown by the on-board computer.
saved as new reference values. As a result, a
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
warning message will appear if the tire pres-
Wheels and tires
sure drops significantly. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio trans-
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
two-way radios) that may be being operated
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
in or near the vehicle.
(Y page 317).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn Checking the tire pressure electroni-
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the cally
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141).
abrupt steering maneuvers. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning wheel to select the Service menu.
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- X Press the 9 or : button to select
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether Tire Pressure.
Pressure
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- X Press the a button.
cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the The current tire pressure of each tire is
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: shown in the multifunction display.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the If the vehicle was parked for longer than
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is displayed after driving a few
not malfunctioning. minutes message is shown.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
minute and then remains lit constantly, the monitor automatically detects new wheels or
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- the tire pressure value to the individual
sage appears in the multifunction display. wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Tire pressure 323
Monitor Active message is shown instead can also define reference values manually as
of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures described here. The tire pressure monitor
are already being monitored. then monitors the new tire pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
Tire pressure monitor warning mes- mended for the corresponding driving sit-
sages uation on the Tire and Loading Information
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure placard on the driver's side
loss in one or more tires, a warning message B-pillar (Y page 317).
is shown in the multifunction display and the Additional tire pressure values for different
yellow tire pressure monitor warning light loads can also be found on the tire pressure
comes on. table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 317).
RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low on all four wheels.
and must be corrected at the next oppor- X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
tunity. 2 in the ignition lock.
RIf the Check Tire Pressure Soon mes- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
sage appears in the multifunction display, ing wheel to select the Service menu.
the tire pressure in one or more tires has X Press the 9 or : button to select
Wheels and tires

dropped significantly and the tires must be Tire Pressure.
Pressure
checked. X Press the a button.
RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire The multifunction display shows the cur-
Failure message appears in the multi- rent tire pressure for each tire or the Tire
function display, the tire pressure in one or pressure will be displayed after
more tires has dropped suddenly and the driving a few minutes message.
tires must be checked. X Press the : button.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in The multifunction display shows the Use
the display messages in the "Tires" section Current Pressures as New Reference
(Y page 237). Values message.
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are If you wish to confirm the restart:
rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- X Press the a button.
played for the wrong positions for a short The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
time. This is rectified after a few minutes of message appears in the multifunction dis-
driving, and the tire pressures are displayed play.
for the correct positions.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
are within the specified range. The new tire
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all pressures are then accepted as reference
existing warning messages are deleted and values and monitored.
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses If you wish to cancel the restart:
the currently set tire pressures as the refer-
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the X Press the % button.
tire pressure monitor will automatically The tire pressure values stored at the last
detect the new reference values after you restart will continue to be monitored.
have changed the tire pressure. However, you
Z
324 Loading the vehicle
Loading the vehicle by one axle (front or rear axle). Never

exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
Instruction labels for tires and loads mum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
steering and driving characteristics and lead
weight rating
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Wheels and tires
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle

weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
: B-pillar, driver's side
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
the maximum possible load. applicable) must not exceed the specified
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard value.
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Tire and Loading Information placard Loading Information placard in the illustra-
shows the maximum permissible number tion are examples. The maximum permis-
of occupants and the maximum permissible load is vehicle-specific and may devi-
sible vehicle load. It also contains details ate from the data shown here. The maxi-
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- mum permissible load that applies for your
sures for tires mounted at the factory. vehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tire
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the and Loading Information placard.
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can
also find information about the maximum
gross axle weight rating on the front and
rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
Loading the vehicle 325
Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
Maximum number of seats : indicates the city calculated in step 4.
maximum number of occupants allowed to X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
travel in the vehicle. This information can be be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
found on the Tire and Loading Information will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to
placard. this Operator's Manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and lug-
i The specifications shown on the Tire and gage load capacity of your vehicle
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
Wheels and tires

(Y page 327).
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
Z
326 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard (Y page 325).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
Wheels and tires
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Maximum load rating 327

Step 3 Permissible load and 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
trailer load/nose- (680 kg) Ò (680 kg) Ò (680 kg) Ò
weight (maximum 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
permissible load rat- = 750 lbs =960 lbs 1350 lbs
ing from the Tire and (340 kg) (435 kg) (612 kg)
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate Maximum load rating

Even if you have calculated the total cargo
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
carefully, you should still make sure that the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the driver's side (Y page 324).
Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 324).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-
ble) must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
missible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight missible weight for which the tire is approved.
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle specific and may deviate from the values in
weighbridge. the illustration.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually between
10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailer
and its load.
Z
328 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- under controlled conditions on a specified

ards U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Overview of Tire Quality Grading times as well on the government course as a
Standards tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
G WARNING
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are The traction grade assigned to this tire is
U.S. government specifications. Their pur- based on straight-ahead braking traction
pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
ble information on tire performance data. Tire nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
Wheels and tires
manufacturers have to grade tires using three acteristics.

performance factors: tread wear :, tire trac-
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
tion ;, and heat resistance =. These regu-
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
lations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless,
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
all tires sold in North America are provided
measured under controlled conditions on
with the corresponding quality grading mark-
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
ings on the sidewall of the tire.
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
All passenger car tires must conform to the traction performance.
statutory safety requirements in addition to
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
these grades.
road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
Where applicable, the tire grading informa- ces.
tion can be found on the tire sidewall between
You should pay special attention to road con-
the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
ditions when temperatures are around the
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- freezing point.
specific and may deviate from the values in Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
the illustration. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter
For example: tires (Y page 316) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
Treadwear Traction Temperature reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
200 AA A
Stopping distance, however, is still consider-
ably greater than when the road is not cov-
ered with ice or snow. Take appropriate care
Treadwear when driving.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested to the drive train.
Tire labeling 329
Temperature Tire labeling

G WARNING Overview of tire labeling
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C. These represent the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance
Wheels and tires

The following markings are on the tire in addition to
which all passenger car tires must meet under the tire name (sales designation) and the manu-
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard facturer's name:
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher : Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard
levels of performance on the laboratory test (Y page 333)
wheel than the minimum required by law. ; DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 332)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 327)
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 320)
A Manufacturer
B Tire material (Y page 333)
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-
city and speed index (Y page 330)
D Load index (Y page 332)
E Tire name
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Z
330 Tire labeling
Tire size designation, load-bearing ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
capacity and speed rating the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
: Tire width inches (in).
; Nominal aspect ratio in % Load bearing index: load bearing index A is
= Tire code a numerical code which specifies the maxi-
? Rim diameter mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
A Load bearing index Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
B Speed rating specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
Wheels and tires
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 324).
General: depending on the manufacturer's Example:
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a maxi-
may not contain any letters or may contain mum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be car-
one letter that precedes the size description. ried by the tires. For further information on
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- the maximum tire load in kilograms and
tion (as shown above): these are passenger pounds, see (Y page 327).
vehicle tires according to European manufac- For further information on the load-bearing
turing standards. index, see Load index (Y page 332).
If "P" precedes the size description: these are Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
approved maximum speed of the tire.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these G WARNING
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu- Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
facturing standards. city and the approved maximum speed could
If "T" precedes the size description: these are lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire is a risk of accident.
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
emergency. approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire load rating and speed rating required for
tire width in millimeters. your vehicle.
Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the Regardless of the speed rating, always
size ratio between the tire height and the tire observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
Tire labeling 331
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)"
tions. indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186mph (300km/h). Ask the
Summer tires
tire manufacturer about the maximum
Index Speed rating speed.
Q up to 100mph (160 km/h) All-weather tires and winter tires
R up to 106mph (170 km/h) Index Speed rating
S up to 112mph (180 km/h) Q M+S3 up to 100mph (160 km/h)
T up to 118mph (190 km/h) T M+S3 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h) H M+S3 up to 130mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149mph (240 km/h) V M+S3 up to 149mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168mph (270 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires.
ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S
identification, the i snow flake symbol
Wheels and tires

ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h) on the tire sidewall. Tires with this marking
fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Man-
ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)
ufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rub-
ber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of the tire traction on snow. They have been
over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in especially developed for driving on snow.
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph
The service specifications consist of load
(210km/h).
bearing index A and speed rating B.
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
RIf the size description of your tire includes
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
"ZR" and there are no service specifica-
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
find out the maximum speed. Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
If a service specification is available, the
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
maximum speed is limited according to the
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 340).
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this exam- Further information about reading tire data
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The can be obtained from any qualified specialist
letter "Y" represents the speed rating and workshop.
the maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186mph (300km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
cation must be given in brackets. Example:
3 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Z
332 Tire labeling
Load index The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or
retreaders to notify customers of recalls or
other safety-related matters. It makes it pos-
sible for the purchaser to easily identify the
affected tires.
The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi-
fication code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the Canadian Trans-
In addition to the load bearing index, load port Ministry.
index : may be imprinted after the letters Manufacturer identification code: manu-
that identify speed index B(Y page 330) on facturer identification code ; provides
the sidewall of the tire. details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
example above), represents a standard tires have a code with four symbols.
load (SL) tire Further information about retreaded tires
Wheels and tires
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced (Y page 314).

tire Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
RLight Load: represents a light load tire Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
RC, D, E: represents a load range that by the manufacturer as a code to describe
depends on the maximum load that the tire specific characteristics of the tire.
can carry at a certain pressure Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- A provides information about the age of a
ate from the data in the example. tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every

new tire manufacturer or retreader has to
imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
produced.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 333
Tire characteristics Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure

The recommended tire pressure applies to
This information describes the tire cord and
the tires mounted at the factory.
the number of layers in sidewall : and under
tire tread ;. The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
ate from the data in the example. maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
Wheels and tires

mended pressures for cold tires for various
Definition of terms for tires and load- operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
ing speed conditions.
Tire ply composition and material
used
Increased vehicle weight due to
Describes the number of plies or the number optional equipment
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, This is the combined weight of all standard
nylon, polyester and other materials. and optional equipment available for the vehi-
cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-
led on the vehicle or not.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds Rim
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
DOT (Department of Transportation)

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the Canadian Transport Ministry. The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
Normal occupant weight gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
The number of occupants for which the vehi- the driver's side.
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb).
Z
334 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Speed rating Load index

The speed rating is part of the tire identifica- In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
tion. It specifies the speed range for which the index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
tire is approved. the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
city more precisely.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

Curb weight
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare The weight of a vehicle with standard equip-
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica- oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed tioning system and optional equipment if
the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as these are installed in the vehicle, but does not
specified on the vehicle identification plate on include passengers or luggage.
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum load rating

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum load rating in kilograms or
Wheels and tires
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross pounds is the maximum weight for which a
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of tire is approved.
the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle Maximum permissible tire pressure
weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
tire.
side.
Maximum load on one tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
The maximum weight is the sum of:
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle by two.
Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
PSI (pounds per square inch)
equipment A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Kilopascal (kPa) Aspect ratio

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Relationship between tire height and tire
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure width in percent.
is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent
of 1 bar.
Changing a wheel 335
Tire pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is pressure inside the tire applying an This is a unique identifier which can be used
outward force to each square inch of the tire's by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
surface. The tire pressure is specified in example for a product recall, and thus identify
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
be corrected when the tires are cold. type code and the manufacturing date.
Tire pressure of cold tires Load bearing index

The tires are cold: The load bearing index (also load index) is a
Rif the vehicle has been parked without code that contains the maximum load bearing
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three capacity of a tire.
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
Traction
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Wheels and tires

Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact Treadwear indicators
with the road.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
Bead level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from Occupant distribution
coming loose from the wheel rim.
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the Total load limit
bead.
Nominal load and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num-
Weight of optional extras ber of seats in the vehicle.
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard Changing a wheel
part and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance Flat tire
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
You can find information on what to do in the
performance battery, are not included in the
event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section
curb weight and the weight of the accesso-
(Y page 296). Information on driving with
ries.
MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can
Z
336 Changing a wheel
be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with Direction of rotation

run-flat characteristics" (Y page 297).
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
Rotating the wheels of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-
efits if the correct direction of rotation is
G WARNING maintained.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
severely impair the driving characteristics if its correct direction of rotation.
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- Storing wheels
dent.
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
and tires are of the same dimensions. tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are loca- Cleaning the wheels
ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used G WARNING
Wheels and tires
near the valve. This could damage the elec- The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
tronic components. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
cialist workshop. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes when changing a wheel Do not use power washers with circular jet
(Y page 335). nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
diately.
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires Mounting a wheel
in the center. Preparing the vehicle
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the inter- X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book level ground.
in your vehicle documents. If no warranty X Apply the electric parking brake manually
book is available, the tires should be rotated (Y page 158).
every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do ahead position.
not change the direction of wheel rotation. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and P.
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel X Switch off the engine.
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-
tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition X On level ground: place chocks or other
lock. suitable items under the front and rear of
X If included in the vehicle equipment, the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
remove the tire-change tool kit from the wheel you wish to change.
vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Wheels and tires

Raising the vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, G WARNING
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
(Y page 296).
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
The folding wheel chock is an additional jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from There is a risk of injury.
rolling away, for example when changing a
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
wheel.
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
X Fold both plates upwards :. must be positioned vertically, directly under
X Fold out lower plate ;. the jacking point of the vehicle.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =. Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle.
Securing the vehicle on level ground Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Z
338 Changing a wheel
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
jack will not be able to achieve its load- the wheel you wish to change by about one
bearing capacity due to the restricted full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
height. pletely.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
Wheels and tires
raised vehicle.
Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the boot when
the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in The jacking points are located just behind the
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. wheel housings of the front wheels and just in
front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels
! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. (arrows).
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the
vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-
ing points on the outer sills.
Steel wheel with wheel trim

X Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully
reach into two of the wheel trim openings
Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip-
and remove the wheel trim. ment)
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
equipment: fold cover ; upwards. X Remove the wheel.
X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-
changing tool kit and place it on the hexa-
Mounting a new wheel
gon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF
are visible. G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. G WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
Wheels and tires

when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
tion (Y page 336).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
Example sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly only use wheel bolts which have been
beneath the jacking point. approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. the wheel securely against the wheel hub
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
Z
340 Wheel and tire combinations
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-

wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the vehicle again.
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: insert the cover into the outer
sill.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
surfaces. ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and Observe the recommended tire pressure
push it on. (Y page 317).
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
ger-tight. wheels mounted must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Lowering the vehicle
Wheels and tires
G WARNING Wheel and tire combinations

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts General notes
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
Have the tightening torque immediately ommends that you only use tires and
checked at a qualified specialist workshop wheels which have been approved by
after a wheel is changed. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
visible. ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
once again standing firmly on the ground. noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
X Place the jack to one side. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
sion variations could cause the tires to
Wheel and tire combinations 341
come into contact with the bodywork and Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
axle components. This could result in dam- ferent type or make in the event of a flat
age to the tires or the vehicle. tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for with run-flat characteristics" section
damage resulting from the use of tires, (Y page 297).
wheels or accessories other than those tes- i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
ted and approved. are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
Information on tires, wheels and approved factory. It is therefore recommended that
combinations can be obtained from any you additionally equip your vehicle with a
qualified specialist workshop. TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
vious damage cannot always be detected fied specialist workshop.
on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- i The following pages contain information
Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
used tires if you have no information about Winter tires are not available at the factory
their previous usage. as standard equipment or optional extras.
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- If you want to equip your vehicle with
Wheels and tires

ing tire tables: approved winter tires, it may be necessary
RBA: both axles to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
size. The size of the approved winter tires
RFA: front axle may differ from the standard tires. This is
RRA: rear axle dependent on the model and the equip-
The recommended pressures for various ment installed at the factory.
operating conditions can be found: The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard information, can be obtained at a qualified
with the recommended tire pressures on specialist workshop.
the B-pillar on the driver's side i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the available at the factory for all countries.
fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 317).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-
mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Z
Tires
CLA 250
Summer tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 V4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)
BA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/40R18 92 W XL4, 5, 6 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
Wheels and tires
All-weather tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 H XL M+S5, 4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Winter tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i5 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2
4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.
5 Also available as MOExtended tires.
6 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.
Wheel and tire combinations 343
CLA 250 4MATIC

Summer tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 V4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL5, 4, 6 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
Wheels and tires

R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 H XL M+S5, 4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Winter tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i5 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2
CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tires
R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
5 Also available as MOExtended tires.
6 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.
Z
R 19
Tires Wheels
BA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
Winter tires
R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 215/45 R18 93 V XL M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
345

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 346
Identification plates ......................... 346
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 347
Vehicle data ...................................... 353
Technical data
346 Identification plates
Useful information

models and all standard and optional equip-
functions.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
i Read the information on qualified special- ; VIN
ist workshops (Y page 26). = Paint code
Information regarding technical data

General information
i The data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

Identification plates ; VIN
Vehicle identification plate with vehi- = Paint code
cle identification number (VIN) i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Service products and filling capacities 347
VIN Service products and filling capaci-

ties
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- of the reach of children.
most position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of the H Environmental note
right-hand front seat. Dispose of service products in an environ-
You will see VIN ;. mentally responsible manner.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations: Service products include the following:
RFuels
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 347) RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Ron the vehicle identification plate RCoolant
Technical data
(Y page 346) RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Engine number
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use prod-
ucts that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tion on the containers:
: Emission control information plate, RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
including the certification of both federal RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
and Californian emissions standards Other designations or recommendations indi-
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) cate a level of quality or a specification in
= Engine number (stamped into the crank- accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
case) MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
348 Service products and filling capacities
Fuel Model Of which

reserve
AMG vehicles Approx.
G WARNING 2.1 US gal
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (8.0 l)
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. All other models Approx.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating 1.6 US gal
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine (6.0 l)
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling. Gasoline
G WARNING Fuel grade

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
There is a risk of injury. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
You must make sure that fuel does not come tion if you accidentally refuel with the
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
observe the following:
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Technical data
using soap and water. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium

grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
95 RON.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
out delay. ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- engine failure.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ! Do not use the following:
ing.
RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RImmediately change out of clothing which
RE100 (100% ethanol)
has come into contact with fuel.
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
Tank capacity
Model Total capa- RM100 (100% methanol)
city RGasoline with metalliferous additives
AMG vehicles 14.8 US gal RDiesel

(56.0 l) Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
All other models 13.2 US gal
tives. This can otherwise lead to engine
(50.0 l)
damage. This does not include cleaning
additives for the removal and prevention of
residue build-up. gasoline may only be
mixed with cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". Additives

You can obtain further information from ! Operating the engine with fuel additives
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. added later can lead to engine failure. Do
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
ance of the engine, only premium-grade not include additives for the removal and
unleaded gasoline must be used. prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives recom-
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded
the instructions for use on the product
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-
label. More information about recommen-
lowing precautions:
ded additives can be obtained from any
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
branded fuels that have additives.
as soon as possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
build up in the injection system as a result. In
speeds over 3,000 rpm. such cases, and in consultation with an
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas- line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used. recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
You will usually find information about the fuel observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the on the container.
Technical data
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis-
tance.
Engine oil
i For further information, consult a quali-
fied specialist workshop or visit General notes
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
CLA 250, CLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary specification other than is necessary to ful-
measure, if the recommended fuel is not fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
available, you may also use regular unleaded change the engine oil or oil filter in order to
gasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/ achieve longer replacement intervals than
93 RON. those prescribed. You could otherwise
All other models: as a temporary measure, if cause engine damage or damage to the
the recommended fuel is not available, you exhaust gas aftertreatment.
may also use regular unleaded gasoline with Follow the instructions in the service inter-
an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may val display regarding the oil change. Other-
reduce engine performance and increase fuel wise, you may damage the engine and the
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and exhaust gas aftertreatment.
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
with a lower AKI. tant safety notes on service products
Information on refueling (Y page 155). (Y page 347).
The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use
Z
engine oils and oil filters that are approved for Engine oil viscosity
vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. Or visit the website
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model Engine MB
model Approval
CLA 250 270 229.5
CLA 250 4MATIC Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
AMG vehicles 133 229.5 this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
for AMG vehicles. (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- temperatures. The table shows you which
tainers. SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
temperature characteristics of engine oils
Filling capacities can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
Technical data
The following values refer to an oil change strongly recommended that you carry out reg-
including the oil filter. ular oil changes using an approved engine oil
with the appropriate SAE classification.
Model Capacity
CLA 250 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)
CLA 250 4MATIC Brake fluid
AMG vehicles 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) G WARNING

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
Additives from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
This could damage the engine. brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the

important safety notes on service products
(Y page 347).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
Information about approved brake fluid can following tasks:
be obtained at any qualified specialist work- Rcorrosion protection
shop or on the Internet at Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
a qualified specialist workshop. to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
Coolant
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
Important safety notes tion in the engine cooling system should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
G WARNING cooling system against freezing down to
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
ponents in the engine compartment, it may Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
Let the engine cool down before you add anti- will not be dissipated as effectively.
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
antifreeze from components before starting
ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-
the engine.
ucts 310.1.
Technical data
! Only add coolant that has been premixed i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
with the desired antifreeze protection. You led with a coolant mixture that ensures
could otherwise damage the engine. adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
Further information on coolants can be tion.
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications i The coolant is checked with every main-
for Service Products, MB Specifications for tenance interval at a qualified specialist
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter- workshop.
net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Filling capacities
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures Model Capacity
prevail. AMG vehicles Approx. 9.1 US qt
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not (8.6 l)
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating. All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
Booklet. according to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 347).
Z
Windshield washer system Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING The climate control system of your vehicle is
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam- filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
mable. If it comes into contact with hot engine The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
components or the exhaust system it could type used can be found on the left, on the
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. underside of the hood.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
level sensor may be damaged. wise, the climate control system may be
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit damaged.
washer fluid should be mixed together. The Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
spray nozzles may otherwise become or replacing components, may only be carried
blocked. out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
Comply with the important safety notes for applicable regulations must be adhered to,
service products when handling washer fluid SAE standard J639 included.
(Y page 347). Always have work on the climate control sys-
At temperatures above freezing: tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
Technical data
shop.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. Refrigerant instruction label
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
ature.
RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-
terFit to 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win- Example: refrigerant instruction label
terFit to 1 part water. : Warning symbol
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB ; Refrigerant filling capacity
WinterFit to 1 part water. = Applicable standards
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB ? PAG oil part number
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer A Type of refrigerant
fluid all year round.
Vehicle data 353
Warning symbol : advises you about: Dimensions and weights

Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model Refrigerant
CLA 250
CLA 250 4MATIC 22.9 ± 0.4 oz Model :
(650 ± 10 g) Opening
height
AMG vehicles 23.6 ± 0.4 oz
(670 ± 10 g) AMG vehicles 68.0 in
(1727 mm)
Model PAG oil All other models 68.9 in

(1749 mm)
CLA 250
CLA 250 4MATIC 4.2 oz Missing values were not available at time of
Technical data
(120 g) going to print.
AMG vehicles Model

Vehicle width 80.0 in (2032 mm)
including exterior
Vehicle data mirrors
General notes Vehicle height 56.5 in (1436 mm)
Please note that for the specified vehicle Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm)
data:
Turning radius 36.1 ft (11 m)
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of: Maximum roof
- tires load
- load
- condition of the suspension Model Vehicle length
- optional equipment
AMG vehicles 184.7 in
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
(4691 mm)
payload.
All other models 182.3 in
(4630 mm)
Z
354 Vehicle data
Model Vehicle height

AMG vehicles 55.7 in (1416 mm)
All other models 56.5 in (1436 mm)
Technical data
355
356

Operator's Manual: Order No. 65155221 13 Part No. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Operator's Manual: Order No. 65155221 13 Part No. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CLA

Order no. 65155221 13 Part no. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 123

Driving and parking .......................... 139

On-board computer and displays .... 195

Stowage and features ...................... 255

Maintenance and care ...................... 281

Breakdown assistance ..................... 295

Wheels and tires ............................... 313

Technical data ................................... 345

1, 2, 3 ... Safety guidelines ............................. 42

ATTENTION ASSIST Automatic transmission emer-

Breakdown Central locking

Setting the airflow ......................... 132 Cornering light function

Display messages Drive program

Rear view camera .......................... 186 Emergency release

Deactivating/activating (except Front fog lamps

Gear or selector lever (cleaning Inspection

Light function, active Locking verification signal (on-

Memory function ............................... 105 O

Operator's Manual Range of the sensors ..................... 179

Rear view camera Roller sunblind

Storing settings (memory func- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80

Steering (display message) .............. 242 Technical data

Tire pressure Load bearing index (definition) ...... 335

Top Tether ............................................ 61 Display message ............................ 226

W Windshield washer system

Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

Function Page Function Page

C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 282

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

B ! Electric parking brake N å ESP® OFF 247

F ü Seat belt 243

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 40

Useful information designed to do and could fail in the event of an

electronic components or their software.

X To activate: press ! button : for at Classification System (OCS)

REmergency Tensioning Devices for the Triggering of Emergency Tensioning

decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

that has deployed must be replaced.

Rhead-on collision backrest

hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag

Side impact air bags

bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as

been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- ing Devices

Problems with the occupant classification system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G WARNING Proper use of the seat belts